JP6688563B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  A gaming machine is known in which the timing at which the reach effect is executed does not change depending on the type of big hit symbol (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-057801, A

However, if the timing at which the specific effect such as the reach effect is executed is fixed, the interest may be reduced.
The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not reduce the interest by not fixing the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

(A) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. later, with the special state control means for controlling the special state, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect suggesting whether controlled said advantageously state, the specific Starring unloading there are a plurality of types, wherein There are a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state as types of advantageous states, and the specific effect execution means is the special state at a timing according to the controlled advantageous state. In the case where the specific effect is executed at the same time and the specific effect is executed a plurality of times during the special state, when the first specific effect is executed at the first timing, a predetermined interval is provided and a second timing is set. so Run the expected high degree of second specific effect that is controlled in the preferred state than serial first specific effect, the specific effect running the first number in the special state after being controlled to the first preferred state , The execution timing of the specific effect executed in the special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state, the specific effect being executed a second number of times larger than the first number of times, and being executed first in the second number of times Is earlier than the execution timing of the specific effect executed first in the first number of times, while notifying a plurality of types of specific effects that can be executed in the special state, and after executing the specific effect, The display device further includes special display executing means for displaying a special display for informing the specific effect that has been executed among the plurality of types of specific effects.
(1) The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display of identification information (for example, is executed by the CPU 103, When the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 13 is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, determined by the jackpot determination process of step S241 shown in FIG. In a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the probability change state that is determined by the processing for determining the jackpot type in step S244 shown in FIG. Therefore, after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit in step S117 shown in FIG. 13, which is executed by the CPU 103). After execution of the winning process, etc.), the special state control means (for example, the winning random number determination process (step S220) of FIG. 16) for controlling the special state (for example, the probability change state executed by the CPU 103) is executed in step S409. The variable display mid-stage production process shown in FIG. 35, which is executed by the CPU 103 for executing the process of determining the jackpot type) and a specific production suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the production control CPU 120). A specific effect execution unit that executes the specific effect executed in step S605 in (step S172) (for example, the specific effect executed in step S605 in the variable display effect process (step S172) shown in FIG. 35 is executed. CPU120 for effect control, etc.), the specific effect executing means is in a controlled advantageous state. At the same timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a timing for performing a specific effect such as reach timing according to the type of jackpot), the specific effect is executed in the special state, and a plurality of times is executed during the special state. In the case of executing the specific effect, after executing the specific effect at the first timing, the specific effect is executed at the second timing with a predetermined interval (for example, according to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 7). The reach timing is such that the reach is not executed continuously.)

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the interest is not deteriorated by not fixing the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above. The specific effect execution means limits the execution of the specific effect when the timing is not in the special state (for example, is set by an effect control pattern set (step S532) shown in FIG. 32, which is executed by the effect control CPU 120). The execution of the specific effect is limited by the effect control pattern described above).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to intentionally determine the occurrence of the specific effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the specific effect is executed based on a first specific effect (for example, the variation category PA3 or PB3 shown in FIG. 5, which is executed by the effect control CPU 120). Normal reach effect) and a second specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the first specific effect (for example, variation category PA4, PA5, PB4 or PB5 shown in FIG. 5, executed by CPU 120 for effect control). The specific effect executing means may execute the first specific effect or the second specific effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to limit unintended specific effects.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the specific effect executed in the special state is notified (for example, the step shown in FIG. 35, which is executed by the effect control CPU 120). The display of the reach history on the image display device 5 in S605-1 may be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can confirm the executed specific effect, and the interest can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, one that limits the execution of the specific effect executed and informed in the special state (for example, executed by the effect control CPU 120, step S53252 shown in FIG. 33). In the process of determining the reach effect type, the reach history type may not be determined by referring to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 34).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest by not executing the specific effect once executed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, when the power-off signal shown in FIG. 2 is received from the power board). In particular, the notification of the specific effect is restored as if the specific effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 38A executed by the CPU 120 for effect control is displayed. The reach history display notifying that the specific effect has been executed four times (MAX) may be restored in the variable display restoration process S529 of FIG. 31.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed more than a predetermined number of times after the recovery from the power failure.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the notification of the specific effect is not performed. As a matter of course, the reach history display for notifying that the specific effect shown in FIG. 38 (B), which is executed by the effect control CPU 120 and is not executed, is displayed as a variable display in FIG. 31. For example, the restoration process S529 may be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the reach from being executed even after the recovery, and to improve the interest.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7), the jackpot type is a first jackpot type that executes a specific effect a first number of times (for example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 7). Is a big hit type that is executed once) and a second big hit type that executes the specific effect a second number of times greater than the first number (for example, a big hit type that executes the specific effect three times as shown in FIG. 7). The special effect that is first executed in the second number of times (for example, the special effect executed at the 30th time of reach timing 1 in the big hit 1 shown in FIG. 7) including the big hit 10). The timing may be earlier than the specific effect executed first in one time (for example, the specific effect executed at the 14th time of the reach timing 10 in the jackpot 1 shown in FIG. 7).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to early termination of the execution of the specific effect, even in the case of the big hit type in which the number of times of executing the specific effect is small.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention. It is a block diagram which illustrates various control boards mounted in a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which illustrates the contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game random number counted by the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates the 1st variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 2nd variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 3rd variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 4th variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 5th variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 6th variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of a display result determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which a microcomputer for game control performs. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the starting winning a prize decision processing in the special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart and the like showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change category judgment. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a variation category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the 1st variation category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the 2nd variation category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the 3rd fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the 4th variation category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the 5th variation category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of the 6th variation category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a game state transition processing at the time of change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power failure restoration processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variable display restoration processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control pattern set. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a reach production classification decision. It is a figure which illustrates the reach production | generation type determination ratio table corresponding to a reach history. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special figure hit waiting process. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of a display of a reach history display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the reach history display after the power failure restoration. It is a figure which shows the example of a variable display which does not become a reach state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the variable display used as a reach state.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing a layout of main members. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "gaming machine") 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. 3 and 3. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launch device and is driven into the game area.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example.
The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has a pair of movable blades that are changed by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning hole. It will be difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter.

  In addition, the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even when it is in the normally open state, but it is more likely that the game ball will enter than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  It should be noted that game balls that have passed (entered) through the winning openings such as the starting winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and large winning openings (described later) are provided corresponding to the respective winning openings. What is detected by the switch (the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the "winning prizes", the winning of the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is referred to as the "starting winning", and in particular, the winning of the first starting winning opening is referred to as the first starting winning. , The winning in the second starting winning opening is referred to as the second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start prize (detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as the prize ball, and the first special figure reserved memory number (described later). ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the image display device 5 A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game (described later) is satisfied.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the number of second special figure reserved storages. If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), a second special figure game (described later) executed on the second special symbol display device 4B or a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 5 A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second start prize may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start prize) that are not executed immediately when the first start prize is generated and are temporarily suspended for execution. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of the winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that has been satisfied first is being executed). That is, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the first special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning awaiting execution. The number of 1st special figure reservation storage decreases one by one whenever one 1st start condition is materialized.

  It should be noted that the variable display corresponding to the first starting prize is satisfied, although the first starting condition for the certain first starting prize is satisfied, but the first starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first starting prize is not satisfied. The information on (1) is stored (held) as suspension data (first special figure suspension information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure reservation information is consumed one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested first special figure reservation information.

  The number of second special figure reservation storages is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are temporarily not executed at the time of the occurrence of the second start prize and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start is performed. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not established (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was established earlier is being executed). That is, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of second special figure reservation storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning awaiting execution. The number of second special figure pending storage decreases by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

  It should be noted that the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is satisfied, although the second start condition for the certain second start prize is satisfied, but the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is not satisfied. The information regarding (1) is stored (held) as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until the second start condition that permits the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure suspension information is executed.

  It should be noted that the number of reserved memories obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is referred to as "total reserved memory number". When the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved storage number” or “reserved storage number”. , "Special figure reserved storage number" or "reserved storage number", any one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, total reserved storage number It may also be referred to. Further, when the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition”. Further, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by, for example, a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open state, closed state).

  As an example, the special variable winning ball device 7 closes the special winning opening door to close the special winning opening when the solenoid 82 is off, and opens the special winning opening door when the solenoid 82 is on. And open the special winning opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening in the open state is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. In other words, by opening the special winning opening, a prize is awarded to the special winning opening.

  Based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 23), a predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening (for example, 12) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of the first starting prize (for example, 3), and the second starting prize. The number is greater than the number of prize balls (for example, three) paid out based on the occurrence of. In other words, whether or not the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player is greatly influenced. That is, when the special winning opening is open, more prize balls can be expected than when the special winning opening is closed, so when the special winning opening is open, when the special winning opening is closed It is very advantageous to the player compared to.

  In addition to or instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is hard to pass (enter) may be provided.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbols (special symbols) that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols (special symbols) that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are " It is also referred to as "second special view".
A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The (variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. In addition, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (similarly to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of numbers including "0" to "9" and "-" as a special figure game. Variable display of special symbols. A symbol number corresponding to each special symbol is attached to each special symbol. As an example, each of the numbers indicating "0" to "9" is given a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol of "-" is given a symbol number of "10". Good. In addition, the special symbol is not limited to the one configured by the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, the symbol indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED are set in advance, and as special symbols. It may be displayed.

  In the right part of the game area on the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B), the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are provided. . The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The 1st hold display which displays possible is performed. For example, the 1st reservation indicator 25A displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible by the number of LEDs to light. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new first starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is held by the establishment of the new first starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is displayed to enable display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new second starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of the new second starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, there are provided a passage gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a universal symbol reservation display device 25C. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of stored ordinary figures (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game (described later) executed in step 1 is established.

  The normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays (variable display) a normal symbol (also referred to as “general symbol” or “normal symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Note that information related to a universal figure game in which the universal figure start condition is satisfied but the universal figure start condition (described later) is not stored is stored (held) as suspension data (general figure suspension information).

  The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves based on the hold data (public figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of ordinary figure holding storages is the number of ordinary figure games which are not executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 and whose execution is temporarily held. Even if the universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game is established by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the universal figure starting condition for permitting the start of the universal figure game is not established ( For example, when the previously established universal figure game is being executed), the execution of the relevant universal figure game is suspended (the relevant universal figure game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of public figure reservation storages is the number of game of the general figure game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The number of stored universal figure reservations decreases by one each time one universal figure start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative pattern display area is arranged. In the decorative pattern display area, a decorative pattern that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each is variably displayed. The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special symbol game using the first special symbol), or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns is executed in the display area (decorative pattern display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative patterns are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Then, in response to the end of the special drawing game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special drawing, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative design that becomes the variable display result (the final design, the final design) (Also referred to as a stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative design is started in association with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game). The fixed decorative design (also called the final stop design) is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative pattern is, for example, 8 types of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images). The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A symbol number corresponding to each decorative pattern is attached to each decorative pattern. As an example, each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8" may be attached with each symbol number "1" to "8". Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (e.g., seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a combination that causes a loss can be configured.

  The variable display result of the special symbol (also referred to as the special symbol display result) is displayed to stop the fixed special symbol and terminate the variable display, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is the fixed decorative symbol (final stop). Stop display to stop the variable display and stop the variable display, and stop display to stop the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the general display result) and the fixed normal symbol to end the variable display. It is also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). The variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to match the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol, the ornament symbol It suffices if the fluctuation time of

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the fixed symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be displayed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the derivation display of the fixed decorative design. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed becomes “0” is displayed for a while, for example, while slightly shaking or expanding / contracting, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Includes those that stop and display without causing slight shaking, stretching, etc.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and a second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR are arranged. In the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL, the first reserved display for displaying the first special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner is performed, as in the case of the first reserved indicator 25A. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, a second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner is performed, as with the second hold display 25B. That is, the number of the second special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified.

  In the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, if there is no other first holding display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL, the first starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is added. If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, further left of the leftmost first hold display). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the hold number of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first decrease The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of holdings of the second special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new second starting condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the second starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR is added. If there is another second hold display on the right side of the other second hold display (to the right of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays), the new second hold display is displayed. You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning award memory display area 5HR and the hold number of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second decrease The second hold display (the second hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). In addition, when the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, as a hold display area, in addition to the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning prize memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information that is consumed by the satisfaction of the first start condition, and the second special map hold information that is consumed by the satisfaction of the second start condition). Active display area AHA that displays a special image showing information including active display (also called display at the time of digestion, display this time) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed based on the special figure hold information (Display time display area, display time display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, although the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, the active display area AHA is displayed. The area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the active display, or the active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display frame or around the active display frame. The information according to is displayed by a special image.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor provided in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls or the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied (stored) to the ball striking device. An upper plate (ball hitting supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side on the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operating stick). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a push / pull operation with a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensor pair) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player directly facing the game machine 1. ) And four transmissive photo sensors in combination with two transmissive photo sensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side. It may be configured to include a sensor.

  As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  A voice output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are provided at the left and right slanted lower parts of the upper plate (the left and right slanted upper parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress status of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM or a song that is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice (speech, message) that is output according to the detection result of the switch or the sensor (for example, the detection of the winning of the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation act on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output according to the operation act on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is issued to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound or a voice that notifies that the reach state (to be described later) shifts to the reach state. , A sound, a voice or the like that gives a notice or suggests that the jackpot game state will be entered before the jackpot game state is entered.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or a decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed in the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting members 9CL and 9CR are installed in the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed in the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, a light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished, they are collectively referred to as the lamp 9. The lamp 9 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) in the game area.

  Although the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are effect devices that perform effects, the gaming machine 1 may include other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as effect devices. Good.

  The arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the gaming machine 1, the universal figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started based on the establishment of the universal figure start condition after the establishment of the universal figure start condition. In the normal figure game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time that is the normal symbol change time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, for example, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is "ordinary symbol loss". Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion and opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  In the gaming machine 1, a special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the first start condition being satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start is performed. Based on that the second start condition is satisfied after the condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. Derivatively display the design (results of special figure display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as the specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, " It becomes "miss". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the predetermined display result may be “small hit”.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols showing numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are big hit symbols, and special symbols showing “−” symbols are lost symbols. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and a lost symbol is a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, the special symbols common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol and a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state which is a specific game state. In the jackpot gaming state, the gaming machine 1 executes a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the special winning opening. Moreover, after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes "small hit", the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The gaming machine 1 opens and closes the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes "big hit" to win the big winning opening. The state of (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the gaming machine 1 changes the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. That is, the gaming machine 1 opens the special winning opening door to keep the special winning opening in an open state at the start of the round, and then closes the special winning opening door to keep the special winning opening in a closed state. Finish the round.

  The gaming machine 1 changes the special winning opening to the open state once in each round (changes the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the gaming machine 1 may change the special winning opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the gaming machine 1 may change the special winning opening to the open state twice in one round (the special winning opening is opened → closed → open → closed during one round). May be changed).

  It should be noted that the special winning opening is maintained in the closed state, not the manner in which the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to start the round (the manner in which the special winning opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts as it is (a mode in which the special winning opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the gaming machine 1 maintains the special winning opening in a closed state without opening the special winning opening door at the start of the round, then opens the special winning opening door to maintain the special winning opening in an open state, and thereafter, You may close the special winning opening door to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times the round is executed in the jackpot gaming state (the predetermined number of rounds) does not have to be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times the round is executed in the jackpot gaming state (predetermined number of rounds) is one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types (for example, 2, 8, 16 times). It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of times the round is executed is the upper limit number (when the above-mentioned predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected, and the predetermined number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached). It should be noted that the gaming machine 1 terminates the execution of the round even if the number of times of execution of the round has not reached the upper limit, because a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not been won in the special winning opening). May be.

  In the round, the special winning opening will be either a predetermined time (open period) after opening the special winning opening door or a predetermined number (eg, 9) of winnings to the special winning opening. Will remain open for up to The predetermined time (opening period) during which the special winning opening is kept open in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, 29 seconds at all times). For example, in the round, the predetermined time (open period) during which the special winning opening is kept open is selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of time (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the special winning opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of the mode in which the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and the round starts, the special winning opening is set until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the special winning opening door is closed. Keep closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts while keeping the special winning opening in the closed state, the special winning opening is in the closed state until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses after the start of the round. Maintained. The predetermined time (closed period) in which the special winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closed period) for which the special winning opening is kept closed in a round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second and 3 seconds). It may be.

  From the above, in the jackpot gaming state, the gaming machine 1 executes, for example, eight rounds each of which changes the big winning opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big winning opening. Each round is changed 16 times (29 seconds) → closed (3 seconds), or the special winning opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed (1 second) → opened (0.1 seconds) ) → Closed state (1 second) and each round can be executed twice. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the gaming machine 1 executes the rounds for changing the big winning opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big winning opening (0.1 It is also possible to execute each round eight times, changing from (second) to closed state (1 second).

  Of the rounds in the big hit game state, a round in which the predetermined winning opening (open period) for which the special winning opening is open is relatively long (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal open round, A round having a relatively short predetermined time (opening period) for opening the special winning opening (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

  In addition, among the special symbols which are the big hit symbols, the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal opening round (the big hit symbols controlled to the big hit game state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round big hit symbols. . Of the special symbols that are big hit symbols, the big hit symbol corresponding to the short-term open round (the big hit symbol controlled in the big hit game state in which the short-term open round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term open round big hit symbol.

  In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state), which is controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as a fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the jackpot game state (short-term open jackpot state) that is controlled after the short-term open-round jackpot symbol is derived as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). It If the normal open big hit state has a higher number of executions of the normal open round than the short open big hit state, the short break open round is executed in addition to the normal open round in the normal open big hit state. In the jackpot state, the normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1, as a jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes “big hit”, the value that the player obtains in each jackpot gaming state, that is, the player It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot game states with different advantages (for example, the number of prize balls (the number of coins)).

  As an example of the case where the short-term open round is not used, a jackpot game state in which a round (normally open round) is executed eight times and a jackpot game state in which a round (normally open round) is executed eight times are more advantageous to the player. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each round (normal opening round) or the time of each opening state (opening time), the round (normal opening round) is set. In the big hit game state of being executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice the number of payouts as in the big hit game state of executing the round (normally open round) 8 times.

  As an example of the case where the short-term open round is used, rather than the jackpot gaming state (actual 8 round jackpot gaming state) in which the regular open round is performed 8 times and then the short-term open round is performed 8 times, It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normally open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous for the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each normal opening round, and the time of each open state (opening time), and the number of coins obtained in the short-term opening round. If the number is negligible, in the big hit game state in which the normal open round is executed 16 times, double the payout in the big hit game state of substantially 8 rounds can be expected.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed after opening the special winning opening door, if the predetermined number of winnings to the special winning opening occur, the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state. However, the value obtained by the player may be different by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, the jackpot game state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of 5 is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of 5 is 8 times. A big hit game state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) in which the predetermined number is 10 is executed eight times, which is more advantageous to the player than the big hit game state in which it is executed, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be different by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit game state in which the normal open round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit game state in which the normal open round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times, You may prepare the big hit game state which performs 16 times the normal opening round which made the number of prize balls 12 pieces.

  In addition to the value that the player obtains by the jackpot gaming state itself (the value that the player obtains during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, (Normal state, time saving state, probability variation state), or a period (eg, time saving number, ST number) in which the state of the gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (eg, time saving state, probability variation state) is maintained. The value obtained by the player may be different after the big hit game state by changing the length and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 16R certainty variation jackpot (described later) is set as a jackpot game state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special drawing game is "big hit". The big hit game state of executing the open round 16 times, and the big hit game state of executing the normal open round 8 times which is controlled after the 8R certainty variation big hit (described later) are prepared. However, the jackpot gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit" is not limited to the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 8R certainty variation big hit, for example, 2R certainty variation big hit, etc. Good. In the following description, the operation of the gaming machine 1 in the gaming state of 16R certainty variation big hit and 8R certainty variation big hit will be mainly described.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of one of the special drawing games among the games, the variable display of the decorative design is started. Then, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative pattern that is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (also referred to as “reach variation pattern”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative patterns are synchronized and vary while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching the reach (establishing the reach).

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a performance action different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The effect operation such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect is an effect mode for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit in response to the reach state. In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before the reach state is set. The operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  Even if the reach state is reached, the reach effect may not be executed. That is, it is a case where the reach state is reached, and the stop display of the decorative design is performed without performing the effect operation different from that before the reach state. By not performing the reach effect, the variable display time is shortened, and the sense of speed can be improved to enhance the interest.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, according to the effect pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different. Thereby, the jackpot expectation can be changed according to which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, according to which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, are preset (prepared).

  Note that the jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of jackpot) × (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that the effect will be performed at a jackpot) × (probability of jackpot) + (jackpot It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not being a big hit)} (when the expectation of a big hit is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern. In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern at, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative pattern display areas (for example, "left" decorative pattern display area) among the temporary stop display decorative pattern display areas 5L and either or both of the decorative pattern display areas 5R of “right”), the decorative design is changed again, and then stopped and displayed, so that the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative symbols are changed. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and there is a case where the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination without being in the reach state is stopped and displayed.

  In the pseudo continuous production, in response to either one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative design is started By the time the design is derived and displayed, all the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo consecutive chance or the like is part of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). (Or displayed on all) is temporarily stopped and then, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting the variable display of all decorative symbols again, is predetermined. It can be performed once (for example, up to four times).

  The number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous production is the number of times of variable display (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are first temporarily stopped ( (1 time), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative patterns (1 time), and the number of times of re-variable display between the first variable display and the last variable display X ( X is 0 or 1 or more), and is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) that is one less than the number of times (X + 2). In addition, the number of times of revariable display is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) in which all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo continuous, The third variable display (second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-link, and the fourth variable display (third re-variable display) to the fourth temporary stop display. It is also called the fourth pseudo-run. In addition, the number of pseudo consecutives in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as a pseudo consecutive variation number (or a pseudo consecutive number). That is, the number of times of pseudo-continuous change, the number of times of revariable display, and the number of temporary stops are the same. It should be noted that the increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first time, the second time, the third time, ... Is also referred to as “the pseudo run continues”.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable design is changed based on that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variable display (re-variation) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started two to five times in a row. Although the present embodiment shows an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5), the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.

  In the pseudo continuous production, before the reach is established in the change (before the reach state is reached), the pseudo continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. As described above, the decorative designs in all the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reaching the reach, in any of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the production mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous production includes at least a production mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state and a production mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily displayed after the reach state. May be. The chance symbol may be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The sliding effect (similar to the pseudo continuous effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that any one of the reach effects may be executed, that a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the jackpot expectation is high. May be. Hereinafter, the effects for giving a notice or suggesting to the player that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the jackpot expectation degree is high may be collectively referred to as an announcement effect. In addition to the sliding effect and the pseudo continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the sliding effect and the pseudo continuous effect, for example, a background image is displayed and a message window is displayed. , Hold display, voice output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), and the like may be used that use effect operations different from the variable display effect.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative design due to the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative design due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before it reaches the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the prize of a certain game ball may be a “big hit” is at least the fixed decorative pattern due to the prize of the game ball being stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

  The notice effect may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “preliminary determination notice effect”). The pre-reading notice production determines whether or not the variable display result of the variable display is a "big hit" before starting the variable display subject to the notice based on the pending information of the special drawing game. (Pre-reading) is a notice effect executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the prefetch notice presentation is referred to as the target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display is referred to as the target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as the target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed while the target hold information is being consumed (when the target hold information is being consumed including variable display of the target) and before the target hold information. There is a case where it is executed while the pending information is being consumed, a case where the target pending information is being consumed, and a case where the pending information prior to the target pending information is being digested.

  The performance operation that becomes the pre-reading notice production by winning a certain game ball is performed by the player after the winning of the game ball (after the start condition is satisfied), and whether or not the content predicted by the pre-reading notice production is realized. It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, due to the prize winning of a certain game ball, at least the decorative operation due to the prize winning of the game ball is at least the presentation operation that is a pre-reading notice effect for notifying (indicating) the player that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state. It may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the play operation of the pre-reading notice effect for notifying (indicating) to the player in advance that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" It suffices that it is executed (started) before the fixed decorative pattern due to winning is stopped and displayed.

  As a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect), a hold effect in a display mode of a first hold display in the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL and a second hold display in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR is prepared. May be. The hold effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL when the first start prize is generated and a second hold display added to the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR when the second start prize is generated. Is displayed in a notice mode (additional hold effect), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode. , The same), or an effect to be executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect (holding effect effect) that is acted on indirectly or indirectly, or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. It should be noted that when the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display), which is the action target, changes, but when the hold action gasse effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of the (second hold display) does not change.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also called “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "miss".

  In the present embodiment, as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number "3" among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", "7") which are jackpot symbols. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it can be set as “8R probability variation big hit” which is one mode of “big hit”. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, it can be set to “16R probability variation big hit” which is one mode of “big hit”. The round controlled when the 8R certainty variation jackpot is a normally open round. That is, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “5” can be normally open round jackpot symbols. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normally open round jackpot symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed as described above, the case where the 8R certainty variation big hit is described is explained, but the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped. When displayed, the short-term open round may be executed so as to be a “2R certainty variation jackpot (also referred to as“ sudden ”)”. In this case, the special symbol showing the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the "big hit", "8R certainty variation big hit", "16R certainty variation big hit", and "2R certainty variation big hit" are referred to as "big hit type".

  In the case of 16R probability variable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached to achieve the predetermined reach effect. After the execution, etc., the fixed decorative design, which is a combination of big hits corresponding to the 16R certainty variation big hit, is stopped and displayed. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R certainty variation jackpot is an identical ornamental pattern having an odd number of a symbol on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight horizontal line) formed by the ornamental pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 in a row (that is, "1", "1", "1" in a row, "3", "3", "3" in a row, "5", "5", " "5", "7", "7", "7").

  In the case of the 8R probability variable big hit, specifically, for example, when the special symbol indicating the number "3" or the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , After the predetermined reach effect is executed in the reach state, the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. One example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit is one in which three identical decorative patterns having an even number are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ( That is, "2", "2", "2", "4", "4", "4", "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8" and the like).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit is provided, when the 2R certainty variation big hit is obtained, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the reach state is set to the predetermined reach effect. After the execution, or the like, or without reaching the reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R certainty variation big hit. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R certainty variation jackpot is that a predetermined decorative line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R has an odd symbol number and a different decorative symbol (at least one of the three symbols). Items with three different decorative patterns (eg, "1", "3", "5", "3", "5", "7", "5", "5", "7") ], Or a combination of decorative designs including a chance design (for example, a combination of “1”, “abutment”, and “2”. “Abutment” is an example of a chance design).

  In addition, in the special drawing game, when the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R sure change big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the surface, the 8R sure change There may be a case where a fixed decorative design which is a combination of big hits is displayed in a stopped state.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variation jackpot has been reached, the normal release round is controlled to a normal release jackpot state that is executed 16 times (rounds), and after that, probability variation control (probability variation control) together with time reduction control (time reduction control) ) Is done. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit has been reached, the normal opening round is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state in which it is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability variation control is performed together with the time saving control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special drawing game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control is performed when a special figure game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability variation number) is executed after the jackpot gaming state is ended, or when the variable display result is "big hit". Ends when is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result is not "big hit" while the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability variation number) is exhausted, the probability variation control is finish. The predetermined number of STs is 50 times, for example. Further, the normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system is reset) is performed.

  Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The time saving control is performed when one of the conditions that the special-drawing game is executed a predetermined number of times during the big hit game state and the variable display result is "big hit" is established first. To end. Therefore, even when the variable display result is not "big hit" while the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control is ended when the special figure game of a predetermined time saving time is exhausted. The predetermined number of times to save time is, for example, 50 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal open big hit state is controlled based on whether the 8R certainty variation big hit or the 16R certainty variation big hit occurs, and after the end, the certainty variation control of a predetermined number of STs (for example, 50 times). In addition, the time saving control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the short-time count and the ST count (probability change count) after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) are the same (both 50 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R The number of times of shortening and the number of times of ST (probability variation number) after the probability variation big hit may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R certainty variation jackpot (probability variation number) and the number of STs after the 16R certainty variation jackpot (probability variation number) are the same (both 50 times). The number of STs after a big hit (probability change count) and the number of STs after a 16R sure change big hit (probability change count) may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of shortening times after the 8R certainty variation jackpot is the same as the number of shortening times after the 16R certainty variation jackpot (both 50 times), but the number of shortening times after the 8R certainty variation jackpot is achieved. And the 16R probability variation jackpot may be different from the number of shorter working hours after the jackpot. In the following description, the jackpot gaming state, the state in which the probability variation control is performed, the state in which the time saving control is performed, etc. may be referred to as an advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation jackpot is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is provided, the short-term opening round is executed twice (round) based on the fact that the 2R certainty variation jackpot is achieved. The state may be controlled, and after that, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time saving control, as in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result is not "big hit" while the probability variation control is being performed, when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is exhausted, Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (probability variation number). When such a mode is adopted, as a mode of "big hit", it is preferable to provide a normal big hit in which the probability variation control is not performed after the end. For example, when the 8R normal big hit is provided, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds) based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is made, and after the end, the probability variation control is performed. Is not performed (time saving control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the "probability variation falling" decision is made to end the probability variation control in the probability variation falling lottery that is executed each time the special figure game is started after the jackpot gaming state has ended. Good. In such a mode, the probability variation falling lottery is not performed until the special figure game having the predetermined ST number (probability variation number) is exhausted, and the special figure game having the predetermined ST number (probability variation number) is exhausted. The probability variation falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time saving control.

  When the time saving control is performed, the control for making the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (general symbol variation time) shorter than that in the normal state, or the variation of the ordinary symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result will be "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilting control time longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of times of tilting as compared with that in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result is obtained. The time until it becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time variation control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high precision low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a “probability variation state” in particular, and may be referred to as a time saving probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time saving control and the high opening control are not performed (high-accuracy low base state) is sometimes referred to as a probability variation state without time saving in order to distinguish it from the high-accuracy high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in the game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special figure game) can be executed. By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the "drawing game and the second special drawing game" will be a "big hit", it becomes an advantageous state for the player. A game state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot game state is also called a special game state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for the decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the temporary stop display of the decorative patterns that are a combination of the big hits corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hits, the same decorative patterns are changed again in a state of being aligned. Alternatively, any one of a decorative pattern which is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and a decoration pattern which is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed decoration pattern.

  In addition, after the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round is ended (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is In the period (until it is started), a round number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is the 16R probability variation jackpot may be executed. Although the 2R certainty variation big hit is not provided in the present embodiment, the same is true when the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R certainty variation big hit is derived and displayed when the 2R certainty variation big hit is provided.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative design which is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the final round is finished ( Alternatively, after the end of the final round, in the period until the next variable display game is started), the probability variation promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  It should be noted that the promotion effect executed during the round (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) is called jackpot medium promotion effect (big hit medium round number promotion effect, jackpot middle probability variation promotion effect), and after the final round is finished. The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) that is executed may be referred to as ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability variation promotion effect).

  FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards mounted on the gaming machine 1. The game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, for example. In addition, the gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the game machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on / off / coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  A power supply voltage is input to the main board 11 from a power supply board (not shown). The power supply board supplies a power supply voltage of a predetermined voltage with the power supplied to the gaming machine 1. However, for example, during a power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board drops. When the power supply voltage output from the power supply board drops below a predetermined value, the power supply board outputs a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped. A power-off signal is input to the main board 11 from the power board. When the power-off signal is input, the main board 11 executes the process corresponding to the power-off.

  When the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 executes power supply stop processing (power-off control processing). The power supply stop process is to save data indicating the gaming state immediately before the power supply is stopped (for example, process flag state, big hit flag state, probability variation flag state, output port output state, etc.). . By saving the game state by the power supply stop processing, the game state immediately before the power supply is stopped can be restored.

  First, the CPU 103 generates parity data of data stored in the RAM 102. The generated parity data is used for comparison with the parity data generated during the power failure recovery process. By comparing the parity data before and after the power failure, it is possible to confirm that the processing at the time of power supply stop was performed correctly.

  Next, the CPU 103 turns on the backup flag and stores it in the RAM 102. The backup flag indicates that the power supply stop process has been executed, and is used to determine whether or not the game state is restored by the data stored in the RAM 102 during the power failure restoration process.

Next, the CPU 103 sets an access prohibition value in the access register of the RAN 102 to prohibit access to the RAM 102. Confirm the data to be saved. The data stored in the RAN 102 is backed up by the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board.
Through the above processing, the CPU 103 ends the power supply stop processing.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and outputs the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as 9 are mounted. That is, the performance control board 12 is an electrical component for performance such as a display operation in the image display device 5, a whole or a part of a sound output operation from the speaker 8, and a whole or a part of a lighting / extinguishing operation in the lamp 9 or the like. Is provided with a function for determining the control content for executing a predetermined effect operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and turns on / off the lamp 9 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. It has a built-in lamp driver circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration such as a so-called sensor that can detect a game ball as a game medium. If In addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 also has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) that are similarly connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic waves). Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern which is variably displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), for example, the result of determination as to whether the variable display result is “miss”, “16R certainty variation big hit”, or “8R certainty variation big hit” and big hit type Different EXT data is set according to the result of the determination.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol fixing command for designating a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the gaming machine 1, for example. The details of the game state designation command will be described later with reference to FIG. The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies execution of power failure recovery processing. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for executing a power failure recovery process after the supply of power is resumed from the power failure state of the gaming machine 1. Upon receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes power failure recovery processing. As the power failure recovery processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, a power failure recovery screen on the image display device 5 to inform the player that the power failure has been recovered.

The command A0XXH is a big hit start designation command. The big hit start designation command is a production control command (also called a "fanfare command") for designating the display of a production image showing the start of the big hit game state.
The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command. The special winning opening opening notification command is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. “XX” of the special winning opening opening notification command indicates the number of times (the number of rounds) the special winning opening is open. The effect control board 12 displays, for example, the number of rounds on the image display device 5 based on the special winning opening opening notification command notified from the game control microcomputer.
The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening. The notification command after opening the special winning opening is an effect control command for notifying that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state.
The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command. The big hit end designation command is an effect control command for specifying the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the special winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round is executed (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term opening jackpot state. Is set.

  The command B100H is a first starting opening winning award designation command. The first start winning combination designation command is an effect control command for notifying the winning of the first starting winning combination. The winning to the first starting winning opening is achieved by the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6A described in FIG. It is detected by the switch 22A. When the first start prize is generated, the effect control board 12 is notified by the first start mouth prize designation command that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game is satisfied.

  The command B200H is a second starting opening winning award designation command. The second start winning combination designation command is an effect control command for notifying the winning of the second starting winning combination. The winning to the second starting winning opening is the second starting opening described with reference to FIG. It is detected by the switch 22B. When the second start prize is generated, the effect control board 12 is notified by the second start mouth prize designation command that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game is satisfied.

  The command B3XXH is a command for designating the number of shortened times. The time saving number designating command is an effect control command for designating the remaining number of time saving states. The remaining number of time saving states is the number of times of variable display in which the time saving state continues until the time saving state ends. “XX” in the hour / hour count designation command B3XXH indicates the remaining number of hours / hours. For example, when the remaining number of time saving states is 30, the time saving number designation command is “B31EH”.

The command B4XXH is a probability variation number designation command. The probability variation number designation command is a production control command that designates the remaining number of probability variation states. The remaining number of the probability variation states is the number of fluctuation displays in which the probability variation state continues until the probability variation state ends. "XX" in the probability variation number designation command B4XXH indicates the number of remaining probability variation states. For example, when the remaining number of the probability variation states is 30, the probability variation number designation command is “B41EH”.
Note that, in the present embodiment, since the case where the number of time reductions and the number of probability variation are the same number of times is explained, “XX” of the time reduction number designating command and “XX” of the probability variation number designating command in this embodiment have the same value.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command. The first reserved memory number notification command is an effect control command for notifying the first special symbol reserved memory number in order to display the first special symbol reserved memory number such that it can be specified in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL or the like. is there.
The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command. The second reserved memory number notification command is an effect control command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the reserved storage information is a first start winning combination designation command or a second starting winning designation designating whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is designated. While transmitting the command, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted while the number of reserved storages decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first A 1-hold storage count subtraction designation command or a second reserve storage count subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  It should be noted that a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH is a designating command. The command C6XXH is a variable category command. The symbol designating command and the variation category command are effect control commands (a winning determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The symbol designating command indicates a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a determination result at the time of winning, and a determination result of a big hit type. The variation category command is a variation category command that indicates the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as the winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative patterns that are categorized into a common group.

FIG. 3C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command for designating the game state.
Commands 9500H to 9504H are details of the game state designation command described with reference to FIG.
The command 9500H is a normal state designation command. The normal state designation command is an effect control command that designates that the game state is the normal state. The normal state in FIG. 3 (C) indicates a state that is neither the time saving state (high base state) nor the definite change state (high definite state) described with the commands 9501H and 9502H below.
The command 9501H is a time saving state designation command. The time saving state designation command is an effect control command for designating that the gaming state is a time saving state (high base).
The command 9502H is a probability variation state designation command. The probability variation state designation command is an effect control command that designates that the game state is a probability variation (high probability) state (ST state).
Command 9503H is a time saving end designation command. The time saving end designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the time saving state has ended.
In addition, in FIG. 3C, as the effect control command for designating the game state, as described above, the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, the probability variation state designation command, the time saving end designation command, the probability variation ending designation command, the time saving number designation. Although the command and the probability variation number designation command have been described as examples, the effect control command for designating the game state is not limited to these. For example, you may make it transmit the production | generation control command which notifies the execution frequency of the production | generation based on the variation pattern demonstrated using FIG. 5A etc. The effect based on the variation pattern is, for example, super reach effect in the ST state.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 15 (A)), when the start winning occurs, the variable display result is determined as "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. If it is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category ( Change pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command or the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" and the big hit type based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and also changes. The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  The effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc.). .. Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is a voice control command, and the light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. It should be noted that some of the effect control commands may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  In addition, the power failure recovery designation command can be notified together with other effect control commands. For example, when the game state designation command is notified together with the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control board 12 can restore the effect device to the game state before the power failure. When the special winning opening opening notification command is notified together with the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control board 12 puts the effect device in the open state (for example, the number of rounds) of the special winning opening in the big hit game state before the power failure. It can be restored together. Moreover, when the first pending storage number notification command or the first pending storage number notification command is notified together with the power failure recovery designation command, the performance control board 12 restores the rendering device according to the number of pending storage before the power failure. You can

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 are updated. A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various floating data to the RAM 102. The CPU 103 stores various data to be temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data that forms a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 11 (for example, information specifying the content of the control command) and various data. The data that constitutes the table is stored.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and a universal figure. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts the numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, to update various numerical data by software, thereby random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" is referred to as "loss variation pattern". The loss variation pattern corresponds to the "non-reach variation pattern (" non-reach variation pattern "" non-reach "when the variable display result of the variable display result is" loss "and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is" non-reach ". (Also referred to as "(miss) variation pattern") ", or" variable display result "variable", "reach variation pattern (" reach lost variation pattern ") corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern being" reach " Also referred to as ")".

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the variable display result "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the variable display result "small hit". Good. As the jackpot variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

  In the non-reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times are prepared corresponding to the time saving control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the game state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. Good. As a result, any one of the variation patterns is selected in accordance with the total number of pending storages and the gaming state, and it is possible to control the variation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state.

  For the variation patterns including the reach effect such as the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. A variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as a “normal reach variation pattern”, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is performed is referred to as a “super reach variation pattern”.

  5A to 5F (hereinafter, abbreviated as “FIG. 5A to F” or “FIG. 5”) show specific examples of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a first variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a second variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5C is a diagram illustrating a third variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5D is a diagram illustrating a fourth variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5E is a diagram illustrating a fifth variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5F is a diagram illustrating a sixth variation category and variation pattern. The variation categories and variation patterns shown in FIGS. 5A to 5F are whether or not they are in a probable variation state (the number of executions of variable display after the jackpot is less than the number of STs, hereinafter also referred to as “ST state”) in the start winning process. One variation category and one variation pattern are selected from the conditions shown in FIGS. The details of the method of selecting the variation category and the variation pattern in the start winning process will be described later.

FIG. 5A is a variation category and variation pattern selected when the gaming state is not the ST state, which is exemplified as the first variation category and variation pattern.
The variation category “PA1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (miss). The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a variation category having a content of non-reach (miss). The variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a fluctuation category having normal reach (miss). The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a variation category having the content of super reach α (miss). The fluctuation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a fluctuation category having the content of super reach β (miss). The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a variation category having a content of normal reach (big hit). The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a variation category having the content of super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a fluctuation category having the content of super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern having a special figure variation time of a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. The special figure change time of the change pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA2-1" because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. Further, the variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-3" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a guise. The special figure change time of the change pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous change (effect) is executed as a fake. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variable big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variable big hit (probability) is provided, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, and “PC3” for the 2R probability variable big hit (probability). May be provided. The fluctuation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern "PC1-2" is a non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  FIG. 5B is a variation category and variation selected when the gaming state is the ST state, the number of variations of the variable display is greater than the predetermined number, and the timing is not reach timing, as an example of the second variation category and variation pattern. It is a pattern. Here, the reach timing refers to the timing at which the reach effect is executed in the ST state. Details of the reach timing will be described later with reference to FIG. 7.

The variation category “PA1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (miss). The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation pattern “PA1-1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”. The variation category “PB1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (big hit).
As a production mode corresponding to the variation pattern “PA1-1”, for example, when the variable display design of the decorative design is decided, the decorative designs of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described in FIG. You may make it stop and shorten the time from the start of variable display of a decorative pattern to the finalization of a decorative pattern. Further, the time during which the decorative pattern is variably displayed may be shortened to shorten the time until the decorative pattern is fixed.

  In FIG. 5B, the variation patterns “PA2-2” to “PA2-3”, the variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, and the variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” described in FIG. 5A. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4”, fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”, fluctuation patterns “PB4-2” to “PB4-4”, and fluctuation pattern “PB5”. -1 "to" PB5-4 "are not selected, that is, when the game state is the ST state, the number of times the variable display is changed is greater than the predetermined number of times, and the reach timing is not reached. Means that the reach effect, the super reach effect, and the pseudo continuous effect are not executed. Therefore, in the case of losing in the ST state which is not the reach timing, the effect mode such as the reach effect is not executed and the variable display time is shortened, so that the interest can be improved.

  In addition, in FIG. 5B, the variation pattern selected when the big hit is PB4-1, which is a variation pattern for executing the super reach α, is illustrated, but the variation pattern selected when the big hit is performed. Is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern in which the super reach β is executed may be selected. Alternatively, a variation pattern may be selected in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the case of a big hit.

  FIG. 5C is a variation selected as an example of the third variation category and variation pattern when the gaming state is the ST state, the variation number of variable display is greater than a predetermined number, and the reach timing is super reach. These are categories and fluctuation patterns.

  The variation category “PA4” is a variation category having the content of super reach α (miss). The variation pattern “PA4-1” belongs to the variation category “PA4”. The variation category “PB4” is a variation category having the content of super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB4”.

  In FIG. 5C, the variation pattern “PA1-1”, the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, the variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, and the variation pattern “PA4” described in FIG. 5A. -2 "to" PA4-4 ", variation patterns" PA5-1 "to" PA5-4 ", variation patterns" PB3-1 "to" PB3-2 ", variation patterns" PB4-2 "to" PB4-4 ". , And the variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” are not selected, that is, the gaming state is the ST state, the number of times of variable display variation is greater than a predetermined number, and the super reach timing is reached. In the case of, the effect of super reach α is executed regardless of whether the game is lost or hit.

  The reach timing at which the reach effect is executed can be predetermined in the number of STs, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 7. As the reach timing, the timings of normal reach and super reach can be set respectively. Therefore, the upper limit number of times of the super-reach executed in the ST state is limited, and when the upper-limit number of times of the super-reach is executed, a big hit can be guaranteed. For example, when the super-reach timing is set three times, the reach timing is not reached in the fourth super-reach, so that a big hit can always be achieved as shown in FIG. 3B. By limiting the upper limit number of super reach, it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, in FIG. 5C, the variation pattern selected at the time of a big hit has exemplified the case where PA4-1 or PB4-1 which is a variation pattern for executing the super reach α is selected, but the variation pattern selected. Is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern in which the super reach β is executed may be selected. Alternatively, a variation pattern may be selected in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the case of a big hit.

  FIG. 5D exemplifies the fourth variation category and variation pattern, and the variation category selected when the gaming state is the ST state, the variation number of variable display is greater than a predetermined number, and the reach timing is the normal reach. And a variation pattern.

  The fluctuation category “PA3” is a fluctuation category having normal reach (miss). The variation pattern “PA3-1” belongs to the variation category “PA3”. The variation category “PB3” is a variation category having a content of normal reach (big hit). The variation pattern “PB3-1” belongs to the variation category “PB3”.

  In FIG. 5D, the variation patterns “PA1-1”, the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, the variation pattern “PA3-2”, and the variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4” described in FIG. 5A. -4 ", variation patterns" PA5-1 "to" PA5-4 ", variation pattern" PB3-2 ", variation patterns" PB4-1 "to" PB4-4 ", and variation pattern" PB5-1 "to "PB5-4" is not selected, that is, when the game state is the ST state, the number of times of variable display change is greater than a predetermined number of times, and the normal reach timing is reached, even if there is a loss, a big hit Even in this case, the normal reach effect is executed.

  The normal reach timing at which the normal reach effect is executed can be determined in advance within the number of STs, like the super reach timing. Therefore, by performing the normal reach and the super reach respectively in the ST state, it is possible to increase the number of presentation modes and improve the interest.

  In addition, in FIG. 5D, the variation pattern selected at the time of a big hit has illustrated the case where PB3-1 which is a variation pattern for executing the normal reach is selected, but the variation pattern selected is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern PB3-2 accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect may be selected.

  FIG. 5E is a variation category and variation pattern that are selected as examples of the fifth variation category and variation pattern when the gaming state is the ST state and the number of times of variation in variable display is within a predetermined number of times. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the reach timing is not set within the predetermined number of fluctuations.

  The variation category “PA1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (miss). The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation pattern “PA1-1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”. The variation category “PB1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (big hit). The variation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the variation category “PB1”. The variation pattern “PB1-1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PB2-1”.

  As an effect mode corresponding to the variation patterns “PA1-1” and “PB1-1”, for example, when the variable display pattern of the decorative pattern is determined, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described in FIG. It is also possible to stop the decorative design at once (stop without setting the reach state) to shorten the time from the start of variable display of the decorative design to the finalization of the decorative design. Further, the time during which the decorative pattern is variably displayed may be shortened to shorten the time until the decorative pattern is fixed. In the present embodiment, a case will be described below as an example in which a decorative aspect in which the decorative pattern is stopped at one time and which does not reach the reach state is performed corresponding to PA1-1 and PB1-1. The effect mode in which the decorative pattern is stopped without being in the reach state may be called “immediate hit” in the case of a big hit, and “immediate lose” in the case of a loss.

In FIG. 5E, the fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, the fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, and the fluctuation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” described in FIG. 5A. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4”, fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”, fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4”, and fluctuation pattern “PB5”. -1 "to" PB5-4 "are not selected, that is, when the game state is the ST state, the number of times the variable display is changed is within a predetermined number of times, and even if the game is lost, it is a big hit. Even in this case, a shortened / non-reach effect is executed.
Performing a production with a sense of speed by executing a shortening / non-reach production and shortening the time until the decorative pattern is determined until the variation of the variable display reaches a predetermined variation number after the ST state. It is possible to improve interests.
In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of scenarios in which the specific effect is executed until the variation of the variable display reaches a predetermined variation number. It is not necessary to set the reach timing described with reference to FIG. 7 when the number of fluctuations of the variable display is within a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the effect mode (scenario) related to the reach effect as compared with the case where the reach timing is set for all the variation times of the ST state.

  In addition, in FIG. 5E, the case where the shortened / non-reach effect is executed has been described, but the effect mode is not limited to this. For example, if the effect is completed within the special figure variation time, only the shortening effect or the non-reach effect may be executed.

  FIG. 5F exemplifies a sixth variation category and variation pattern, and the variation category and variation selected when the gaming state is the ST state, the number of variation of the variable display is more than the predetermined number, and the reach timing is not reached. It is a pattern. The sixth variation category and variation pattern shown in FIG. 5F are alternatives to the second variation category and variation pattern described in FIG. 5B. That is, when the game state is the ST state, the number of fluctuations of the variable display is more than the predetermined number, and the reach timing is not reached, either the second fluctuation category and the fluctuation pattern, or the sixth fluctuation category and the fluctuation pattern. One will be used.

  The variation category “PA1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (miss). The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation pattern “PA1-1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”. The variation category “PB1” is a variation category having the content of shortening / non-reach (big hit).

In FIG. 5F, the variation pattern “PA4-1” is added to the variation pattern described in FIG. 5B. That is, when the gaming state is the ST state, the number of variation times of the variable display is more than the predetermined number of times, and the reach timing is not reached, in the case of losing, the sixth variation category and the variation pattern are the second variation category. It is assumed that a variation pattern corresponding to the super reach α that is not selected as the variation pattern may be selected.
In the present embodiment, even when the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach α (miss) is selected by the sixth variation category and variation pattern shown in FIG. 5F, the pseudo control effect is produced in the effect control board 12. The effect control that is executed so as not to perform the effect of super reach will be described later. By avoiding the execution of the reach effect when it is not the reach timing, it is possible to execute the effect mode in which the upper limit of the reach effect is managed and notified, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, in FIG. 5F, the selected variation pattern is PB4-1 that is a variation pattern for executing the super reach α, but the selected variation pattern is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern in which the super reach β is executed may be selected. Alternatively, a variation pattern may be selected in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the case of a big hit.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Before being executed, it is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The types of big hits are, for example, 16R certainty variation big hits, 8R certainty variation big hits, and the like. In addition, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. , Is referred to for determining whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit (16R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit)" in the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It's a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit)”. It is assigned to the special map display result of "Miss". Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (decision) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy high base state. Value) is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "miss".

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result than when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state. ing. Specifically, in the low accurate low base state, a predetermined number (specifically 190) of determination values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit”. There is. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy / high-base state, a larger number (specifically, 819) of the determination values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as “big hit” as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). The probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state increases.

  It should be noted that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, and in the first special figure display result decision table for the first special figure, the special range display result of the "small hit" is within a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result decision table for the second special figure, the decision value is assigned to the decision value, and the decision value in the predetermined range smaller than that in the first special figure display result decision table is the “small hit” special figure display result. May be assigned to. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "small hit" in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the structure of the jackpot type determination table will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result being "jack". It is a table referred to for.
In addition, in the jackpot type determination table 131 exemplified in the present embodiment, a case where the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, and a second special symbol. The case where it is commonly used in the case of executing the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure) by the symbol display device 4B is illustrated. However, the jackpot type determination table assigns a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination for each of the first special figure game and the second special figure game to determine the big hit type. You may do it.
Further, the jackpot type determination table 131 illustrated in FIG. 7 is not divided into the 16R certainty variation jackpot and the 8R certainty variation jackpot as the jackpot types, and is commonly used in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, As will be described later, 16R certainty variation big hits and 8R certainty variation big hits may be separately set as the big hit types.

In FIG. 7, the big hit type determination table 131 has field items of “big hit type”, “reach timing”, and “judgment value”.
It is assumed that there are 10 types of big hits, 1 to 10 big hits. Reach timings are set in advance for each type of jackpot. The jackpot type is determined according to the jackpot, and the reach timing is determined according to the determined jackpot type.
The reach timing is a timing at which the specific effect is always executed when the number of fluctuations in the variable display reaches the value (nth time) shown in FIG. 7 in the ST state after the end of the big hit. In this embodiment, the reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect. Further, in FIG. 7, the reach timing is illustrated as the timing at which the specific effect is executed. The reach timing is the timing at which the reach effect is executed. FIG. 7 sets the number of times of variable display change since the ST state in which the reach effect is executed, as the reach timing.
In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol illustrated as the specific display result is derived and displayed is a big hit, when it is controlled by the DPU 103 to the probability variation state illustrated as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. , Shows a case where the super reach illustrated as the specific effect is executed at the reach timing corresponding to the jackpot type illustrated as the timing corresponding to the advantageous state. That is, since the timing at which the reach timing is executed varies depending on the type of jackpot, the timing at which the super reach is executed is not fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the fixed timing of executing the super reach.
The reach timing is set in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, for example.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reach effect is exemplified as the type of the specific effect executed at the timing corresponding to the big hit, but the type of the specific effect executed at the timing corresponding to the big hit is not limited to the reach effect. The specific effect that is not provided may be an effect that is performed while the variable display is changing in a special state (for example, the ST state), and for example, another type of effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. Further, in the reach timing, the execution timing of the super reach is set, but the timing of other specific effects may be set. For example, the respective execution timings of the reach effect and the pseudo continuous effect may be set.
In the reach effect in which the reach timing is set in FIG. 7, the normal reach effect corresponding to the normal reach with the variation category of PA3 (miss) or PB3 (big hit), and the variation category of PA4 (miss), PA5 (loss), PB4 ( It includes a super-reach effect corresponding to a super-reach of big hit) or PB5 (big hit). The mark * shown in FIG. 7 indicates the number of fluctuations in which the normal reach effect is executed, and the blank indicates the number of fluctuations in which the super reach effect is executed. Reach timings can be set up to three times of reach timings 1 to 3 for each jackpot type.
In the present embodiment, a normal reach effect is exemplified as the first specific effect, and a super reach effect is exemplified as the second specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the first specific effect. The reach timing set in FIG. 7 includes a timing for performing normal reach and a timing for performing super reach, and the CPU 103 executes normal reach or super reach according to the reach timing setting. This can limit unintended specific effects.

For example, in FIG. 7, when the big hit type is big hit 1, the reach timing is set to reach timing 1. In the reach timing 1, the number of fluctuations in the ST state after the jackpot is the 30th time, and the reach effect to be executed is the super reach. That is, when the big hit type is big hit 1, only one 30th super-reach in the reach timing 1 is set among the 50 ST times in the present embodiment, and reach timings 2 to 3 are not set. .
Further, when the big hit type is big hit 10, the reach timing is set to three times of reach timings 1 to 3. Reach timing 1 is the 14th super reach in which the number of fluctuations in the ST state after the jackpot is over. The reach timing 2 is a super reach in which the number of fluctuations in the ST state after the jackpot is the 20th time. Further, the reach timing 3 is a super reach in which the number of fluctuations in the ST state after the end of the big hit is the 39th time.

  The determination value is a determination value (determination range) of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type for each jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the determined value of the random number value MR2 is generated between 0 and 99. For example, the jackpot type of jackpot 1 is determined when the random number value MR2 is generated with a determined value of 0-9. In addition, the generation range of the random number value MR2 and the determination range for each jackpot type are arbitrary.

As described above, at the set reach timing, the reach effect is performed with the set number of fluctuations even in the case of a loss or a big hit. Further, in the starting winning process, which will be described later, the execution of the reach effect due to a loss is prohibited when the number of times of variable display changes that is not the reach timing.
When the reach timing is not reached in the ST state, it is possible to intentionally determine the occurrence of the super reach effect by limiting the execution of the super reach effect.
Further, since the reach timing is set up to three times of reach timings 1 to 3, the lost reach effect is not executed four times in the ST state, and the reach effect of the fourth time is always a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide four ceilings for the reach effect. When the ceiling is provided for the reach effect, the player is made aware of the number of times the reach effect is executed in the ST state, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for a big hit and improve the enjoyment.

The number of fluctuations set at the reach timing is arbitrary in the number of STs. In the present embodiment, the case where the number of STs is 50 is illustrated, so the number of fluctuations set as the reach timing can be set from the first time to the 50th time. However, if the reach timing is set to end with an earlier number of fluctuations, the reach effect may not be performed with the remaining number of fluctuations up to the number of STs, which may reduce interest. On the other hand, if the reach timing is set to start from a slower number of fluctuations, it gives the player the impression that the reach production ceiling cannot be reached with the remaining number of times up to the ST number, and the interest is also reduced. There are cases.
Further, when the reach timing is set twice or more, if the interval between the reach timings is short, the period during which the reach effect is not executed may become long and the interest may deteriorate.

The reach timing shown in FIG. 7 is set in view of the above viewpoint.
First, in this embodiment, the reach timing interval is set so as not to become short. That is, the interval between the reach timing 1 and the reach timing 2 and the interval between the reach timing 2 and the reach timing 3 are set to be a predetermined interval without being continuous. By not shortening the reach timing intervals, such as when the reach timings are not made continuous, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest due to continuous reach effects that are lost.
In addition, in the case of the big hit type 1 or big hit 2 in which only the reach timing 1 is set, the reach timing is set to the 30th and 40th, which is slightly later than the 25th half of the 50 times of the ST times. Further, the first variation number (15th to 25th) set at the reach timing 1 of the big hits 3 to 5 with the reach timing set twice is the big hit type with the reach timing set once. It is set earlier than the first variation number (30th to 40th) set for the big hits 1 and 2. Similarly, the jackpot type in which the reach timing is set three times is the big hit type in which the reach timing is set twice, for the first variation number (11th to 14th) set in the reach timing 1 of 6-10 big hits. Is set earlier than the first number of fluctuations (15th to 25th times) set by jackpots 3 to 5. Therefore, the reach effect is executed at an appropriate reach timing within the number of STs, and the interest can be improved.
That is, the jackpot type includes a first jackpot type that executes the super-reach effect a first number of times and a second jackpot type that executes the super-reach effect a second number of times greater than the first number of times. The super-reach effect executed first among them is earlier than the super-reach effect executed first within the first number of times. Therefore, even if the jackpot type has a small number of times of executing the super reach effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the end of the execution of the super reach effect.

  Further, in the reach timing setting shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing 1 is not set for the first to tenth variation times. This is to perform the effect based on the variation pattern PA1 or PB1 in which the special figure variation time described in FIG. 5E is reduced in the first to tenth variation times. When the number of changes is from the first time to the tenth time, the reach effect is not performed and the special figure change time is shortened, so variable display with a sense of speed can be performed, and interest can be improved.

In the above, the jackpot type determination table 131 described above exemplifies a case in which the 16R certainty variation big hit and the 8R certainty variation big hit are not distinguished as the big hit types, and are commonly used in the first special figure game and the second special figure game. However, in the big hit type determination table 131, 16R certainty variation big hits and 8R certainty variation big hits may be set separately. For example, when the random number generation range is 0 to 199, the reach timing in each of 10 types of big hits may be set by setting 0 to 99 as the 16R certainty big hit and 100 to 199 as the 8R certainty big hit. Further, the jackpot type determination table may be separately set for the first special figure game and the second special figure game.
Further, the case where there are 10 types of big hits 1 to 10 as the big hit types has been described, but the big hit types are not limited to 10 types. For example, 100 types may be prepared as a jackpot type.
Further, although the case has been described where the reach timing is a value that is predetermined according to each jackpot type, the reach timing may be variable. For example, the reach timing may be set differently according to the operation of the push button 31B or the like by the player.
In addition, the reach effect executed at the reach timing has been described as including both the super reach effect and the normal reach effect described in FIG. 5A and the like. However, the reach effect may not include both the super reach effect and the normal reach effect. For example, the reach timing for only the super reach effect may be set. Further, the reach timing may be set only for the normal reach effect.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but in the case of providing the 2R certainty variation big hit (collision probability), in the case of the second special figure game, as compared with the case of the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, it is less likely to be a 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) than in the first special figure, so that the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to the extension of the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in determining any of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the variation category determination table, each variation category is assigned a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value and the number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category of a plurality of types of variation categories. There is. Instead of the plurality of fluctuation category determination tables, one large fluctuation category determination table including information of all the fluctuation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range or the number of determination values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. There is. Note that, instead of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one large fluctuation pattern determination table including the information of each fluctuation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.
This is the end of the description of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table using FIG. 7.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is supplied with a backup power source created in a power supply board to back up a part or all of the stored contents of the RAM 102. That is, even when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and the supply of the power supply voltage is stopped from the power supply board, the backup power supply cannot be supplied for a predetermined period (the capacitor or the battery as the backup power supply is discharged. Up to), part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved. In particular, at least the data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means, when the power is restored after the occurrence of a power failure, etc., the data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure, etc. Process flag). Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1. . The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special figure reservation storage section 151A, a second special figure reservation storage section 151B, a general figure reservation storage section 151C, a game control flag setting section 152, and a game. It is provided with a control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which a game ball has passed (entered) through a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and a first starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started ( Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a winning number into the first starting winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with a holding number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on passage (entry) of the gaming ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (first special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning number into the second start winning opening (detection order of the game ball) with the reservation number, and the CPU 103 generates a random number based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (second special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  In addition, the holding data of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition), and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number.

  The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation data regarding the general figure game that has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (general figure reservation, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21). Information). For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reservation data (universal figure reservation information) is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 includes a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a highly accurate state (ST state), and a time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state). Data indicating the value of the flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like are stored for each of the above.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter for counting total pending storage number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value, which is a value stored in the variation counter for counting one or both of the ST number (probability variation number) and the time saving number.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area of the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120, and a random number that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value. A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the RAM 122 in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the CPU 120 for effect control receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and a CPU 120 for effect control I / O. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  To the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control board 13 are transmitted. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of the player for the stick controller 31A is detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data used for controlling the production operation are stored in addition to the program for production control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the holding effect. For example, in the ROM 121, as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of adding the first hold display, any one of a plurality of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL is set. The first hold display mode determination table referred to for determining may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first reserved display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first reserved display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. . In each of the first hold display mode determination tables, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including the information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of adding the first hold display, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to for determining whether to store or not may be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to the execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, is the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL changed to another display mode? In order to determine the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not, and to determine which of the plurality of types the display mode is to be changed to when changing to another display mode The referenced first pending change mode determination table may be stored. Specifically, in the ROM 121, a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different display modes and different determination rates of no change to the other display modes, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored which differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In each of the first pending change presence / absence determination tables, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of change may be assigned to each of the presence or absence of change. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the changed first hold display is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first pending change presence / absence decision tables, one large first pending change presence / absence decision table including information of all the first pending change presence / absence decision tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first pending change mode determination tables, one large first pending change mode determination table including information of all the first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start winning award storage display area 5HR is changed to another display mode as a table relating to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. A second holding change presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not, and to determine which display mode of a plurality of types to change to when changing to another display mode The second hold change mode determination table referred to by may be stored.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing such as how many times the change is executed). It may have been done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that differ from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. May be. In each of the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Good. Similarly, the ROM 121 stores a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing such as how many times the change is executed). It may be stored.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 is a table including information of two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. May be stored in.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). In addition, as a table relating to the holding effect production to be acted on indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether to execute the holding effect production may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables having different execution / non-execution determination ratios. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding effect effect, the holding effect effect effect referred to for determining which of the plurality of effect modes is to be performed when it is determined to execute the holding effect effect. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of holding effect production effect mode determination tables may be stored that differ from each other in the type of the effect mode of the holding effect effect that can be determined in the holding effect effect effect effect mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. . A numerical value (determined value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold action effect may be assigned to each effect mode in each of the hold effect effect effect mode determination tables.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). Alternatively, as a table relating to the holding effect gas effect, which is indirectly or indirectly operated, an effect gas effect effect execution / non-execution determination table that is referred to for determining whether to execute the hold effect gas effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination tables having different determination rates of execution and non-execution. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining execution or non-execution may be allocated to each of the action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, with or without execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding effect gas effect, when it is determined to execute the holding effect gas effect, the holding effect referred to for determining which of the plurality of effect modes is to be performed. You may memorize | store the gall production production | generation production mode determination table in ROM121. Specifically, a plurality of holding effect gas effect production effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of the effect mode of the hold effect gas effect that can be determined in the hold effect gas effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios are stored. May be. Even if a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect gas effect is assigned to each effect mode, in each of the hold effect gas effect effect effect mode determination tables. Good.

  When executing an active display change effect (described later) that changes the special image including the active display, the ROM 121 determines whether to execute the active display change effect as a table relating to the active display change effect. An active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables having different determination rates of execution and non-execution. In each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining execution / non-execution may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to for determining which of the plurality of effect modes is to be performed. The change effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect production effect mode determination tables in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect effect mode determination table, the respective determination ratios, and the like are different are stored. May be. In the respective active display change effect effect mode determination tables, even if a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect is assigned to each effect mode, Good.

  The active display change effect is an effect of changing the special image to a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, information according to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame, or the like) is used as a notice mode. It is a production that changes. It should be noted that there may be a case where the active display change gallery effect, which is an effect mode that is at least partially common to the active display change effect, is executed. As the main notice effect such as the step-up notice effect, an active display change effect or an active display change guse effect may be executed.

  Further, in the ROM 121, a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the effect model, etc.) are configured. The data etc. to be stored are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), etc. are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is displayed. Variable display operation of symbols, reach effects, re-lottery effects, or other various types of effect operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in first start winning prize memory display area 5HL) Effect, and hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR), and the like, and the like, and the like, and the like, and the like, and the like, which are data indicating the control contents of various effect operations.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. It suffices that the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of effect control, and the like are set in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed in the effect control CPU 120 as a process for controlling the effect operation. As described above, data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of effect sound and the like linked to the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating the period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and is specified by the operation detection control data. During the operation valid period, which is a period during which the operation is valid, control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B and determining the effect contents is performed. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set in the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The production operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to various corresponding control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, Control of movable members included in the production model) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n show the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device, and specify the execution of effect control. Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM to develop the image data. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability variation flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, for each of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. In addition, the effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating the effect number count value, which is the stored value of the effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time saving and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, the data forming the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4"). . When there is a start winning prize to the first start winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning award designation command (first starting award prize designation command), a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a reserved memory number notification command (a first reserved memory number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A, of these commands, a storage area is secured so that the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they were received at the time of the first start winning a prize, from the beginning in the empty area of the first start winning a prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the first starting winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation The category command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening winning award designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start mouth winning award designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” becomes the buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the data forming the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start prize winning command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4"). . When there is a starting winning prize to the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved storage number notification command (second reserved storage number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number notification command among these commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the second start winning prize from the beginning in the empty area of the second start prize receiving command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the second starting winning award designating command, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the storage areas corresponding to the respective buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start opening winning award designation command, the symbol designation command , The variable category command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in that order. In FIG. 10C, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start prize winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number of the commands associated with the second starting opening winning a prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (1 set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second starting mouth winning award designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the first prefetching notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetching notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the determination content regarding the read-ahead notice effect related to each holding information determined by the effect control CPU 120, etc. in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the hold data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start-up winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, In the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in the other buffer in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the second prefetching notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second pre-reading notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D stores the determination content regarding the pre-reading notice production related to each holding information decided by the production control CPU 120 or the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of the decorative design, In the second prefetching notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in the other buffer in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetching notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

First, the operation of the game control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100.
In FIG. 11, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, , CPU103) executes a security check process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not, and then starts the main process after step S001. In the main process, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S002), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set to the accessible state (step S005). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch, which is input through the input port of the I / O 105, is in the on state (step S6). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is in the on state (step S007; YES), it executes a normal initialization process (steps S010 to S014).

On the other hand, when determining that the clear switch is not in the on state (step S007; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the power supply stop time process has been performed (step S008). The power supply stop processing is, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, the state of the gaming machine 1 in order to restore the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the like. Is a data protection process for temporarily backing up the data of. Data backup is performed, for example, by storing protected data in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power supply. The data may be backed up by saving the data in the backup RAM area when detecting that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not backup data exists in the backup RAM area. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined, for example, by the presence or absence of a backup flag that is set when backing up the data. Further, it can be determined by whether or not the parity data is added to the backup RAM area.
When it is determined that the power supply stop time process is not performed (step S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process starting from step S010.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the power supply stoppage process has been performed (step S008; YES), the CPU 103 performs a parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area and determines whether the check result is OK. It is determined whether or not (step S009). In the process of step S009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 when the power supply is stopped is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up in the power supply stop process, The check result is judged based on the agreement between the two. When the power supply stop process is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the power supply is started. On the other hand, both checksums do not match when the power supply stop process is not performed correctly. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped. When the parity check result is not OK (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing executed at power-on, which is not restoration by the power supply stop processing (step S010 to step S014).

On the other hand, when the result of the parity check is OK (step S009; YES), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (steps S41 to S44) for returning the game state of the gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply was stopped. To do.
In step S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 to the pointer (step S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table to the work area (area in the RAM 102) ( Step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is in the portion of the work area that is not initialized. The part that is not initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state when the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), For example, a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

After executing the process of step S42, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 (step S43), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup command transmission table in the work area (in the RAM 102). Area), and the commands stored in the command transmission table during backup can be transmitted.
After executing the process of step S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). The CPU 103 may send the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with the power failure recovery designation command. As the command to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command, for example, the variable display result command (8CXXH) described in FIG. 3, the symbol confirmation command (8F00), the game state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), large These are a winning opening opening notification (A1XX), a big winning opening opening notification (A2XX), a time saving number designation command (B3XX), a probability variation number designation command (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it becomes possible to recover the state of the gaming machine at the time of stopping the power supply.
After executing the processing of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S015.

In the process of step S008, when it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed (step S008; NO), or when it is determined that the check result of the parity check is not OK in the process of step S009 (step S009; No), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process starting from step S010.
In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear processing. The data to be initialized is, for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining the normal symbol. The data is initialized by setting the value of the data to 0. However, for example, a predetermined initial value may be set as the data. Further, the initialization is performed on the entire storage area of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. The non-initialized area may be, for example, an area in which data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination is stored.

After executing the processing of step S010, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S011), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the initial values of the work area. (Step S012).
By the processing of steps S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that are set in the game control flag setting unit 152 and that can be updated in state in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. It Further, initial values are set for various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. Further, an initial value is set for a counter, which is set for the game control counter setting unit 154, for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. Further, initial values are set for various buffers that are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1.

After executing the processing of step S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the initialization command transmission table in the pointer (step S013) and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). Then, the commands stored in the command transmission table during initialization can be transmitted.
After executing the process of step S013, the CPU 103 initializes a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted other than the main board 11) such as the effect control board 12 to specify an initialization command (game control microcomputer). A command indicating that 100 has executed the initialization process) is transmitted to the sub-board (step S014). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization designation command, the image display device 5 displays an initial screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs initialization notification.

  After executing the process of step S014 or the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S015). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update a random value within a range of a predetermined random number value.

  Furthermore, in step S015, the CPU 103 sets the register of the game control timer so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms. The game control microcomputer 100 has a built-in CTC (counter / timer circuit). As the game control timer, the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 can be used.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number updating process (step S018) and the display random number updating process (step S019) in the main process. When executing the initial value random number updating process and the display random number updating process, the interrupt prohibition process is executed (step S017), and the interrupt process by the game control timer is prohibited. When the display random number updating process and the initial value random number updating process are completed, the interrupt permission process is executed (step S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released.
In the present embodiment, the display random number for which the updating process is executed in step S019 is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, and whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. It is a random number to do. In the display random number updating process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated.
In addition, the initial value random number for which the update process is executed in step S018 is a count of a counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number for determining the initial value. In the initial value random number updating process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
This is the end of the description of the main process using FIG. 11.

Next, the game control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing.
When the CPU 103 receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate circuit 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the gaming machine 1 is output (step S13). ).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and the opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the substrate 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by setting the switch to the off state. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.
This is the end of the description of the game control timer interrupt process using FIG.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process of step S15, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). First, the start winning determination process of step S101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19F.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting winning prize process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the starting winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is in the on state (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation storage number (the first special figure game reservation number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit storage number). (4)) is determined (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" ( Step S207).

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is in the off state in step S201 (step S201; NO), when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the process of step S209, the second starting port switch is set based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in the ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation storage number (second special figure game reservation number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, upper limit storage number). (4)) is determined (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S210).

  After executing the processing of step S207, the processing for starting winning (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the value stored in the starting opening buffer is "0 (initialized)" (step S209), and the processing of step S203. Proceed to. After performing the process of step S210, the process of starting winning (FIG. 15) is executed (step S211), the value stored in the starting mouth buffer is set to “0 (initialization)” (step S212), and the winning determination process of starting is performed. To finish. As a result, even when the first winning opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the game ball, it is possible to complete the processing based on the respective detections.

  The CPU 103 updates the number of special figure reservation storages corresponding to the starting mouth buffer value, which is the value stored in the starting mouth buffer, by 1 as the starting winning process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. 15 (step S208). S215). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of step S215, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determination and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). Numerical data indicating each random number thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning award designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is notified. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning a prize designation command is performed. The start opening winning award designation command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the production control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the suspension storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S221). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the production control board 12.

Next, the winning random number determination process in step S220 will be described with reference to FIG.
As the winning random number determination process (step S220), the CPU 103 confirms the current game state of the gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of a time saving flag or a probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. It is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is in the on state by checking the states of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and the probability variation flag is in the off state. When the time saving flag is in the on state, it is specified that the time saving state is in effect. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the on state or the off state, for example, the probability variation flag is in the on state and the time saving flag is on. If it is in the state, the gaming state is identified as the high-accuracy high-base state, and if the probability variation flag is in the ON state and the time saving flag is in the OFF state, the gaming state is identified as the high-accuracy low-base state. However, if the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, it is specified as the low accuracy high base state, and if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are both off, the low accuracy low base state (normal State). That is, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current game state is, by the state of each of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing of step S401, table data corresponding to the current game state is set from the table data forming the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When the different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table and second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is "1". In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table may be used, and when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the process for starting winning a prize shown in FIG. 15 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step). S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table data set by the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each value. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the decision values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by making a comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jackpot” (jump jack start determination). can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (jackpot) (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. The jackpot type determination table data is selected from the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, the high-accuracy state (ST state) is always set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing is set for each of the determined types of jackpots. The reach timing based on the selected jackpot type is set in the game control counter setting unit 154 in the processing for setting the reach timing in step S320 in the jackpot end processing (step S117) described later with reference to FIG. Therefore, in the process of step S409, the CPU 103 stores the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, making it readable in the jackpot end process (step S117). To do.

  The CPU 103 is set to transmit a symbol designating command to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result of the process of step S409 (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; NO), or when the process of step S410 is executed, the CPU 103 executes the variation category determination (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIGS. The variation category determination in step S412 will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S412, the CPU 103 executes one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 16B according to the variation category determination result (variation category determination result) by the process of step S412. 12 is set for transmission (step S413), and the winning random number determination process of step S220 is ended.
This is the end of the description of the winning random number determination process in step S220 using FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of variation category determination in step S412 of FIG. In the variation category determination, a determination table used to select the variation category determination table is selected, the variation category determination table is selected using the selected determination table, and the variation category determination process is further executed.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the ST state (step S4121). Whether the gaming state is the ST state or not is determined by the state (on-state or off-state) of the probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state set in the game control flag setting unit 152 described in FIG. 8 is the ST state. can do.

  In the process of step S4121, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the ST state (step S4121; NO), the CPU 103 selects the determination table a (step S4129) and determines the variation category (step S4130). The determination table a is a determination table selected when the ST state is not set, and selects the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5A. The details of the determination tables a to f will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the ST state (step S4121; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is within 10 (step S4122). Whether the value of the variation counter is within 10 can be determined by the value of the variation counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation number counter counts the number of times of variable display after the end of the big hit. The fluctuation number counter counts the number of fluctuations until the count number reaches the ST number (for example, 50 times) and the ST state disappears or a big hit occurs.

  In the process of step S4122, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter is within 10 (step S4122; YES), the CPU 103 selects the determination table e (step S4128) and determines the variation category (step S4130). ). The determination table e is a determination table in which the number of changes in the ST state is selected within 10 times, and selects the change category determination table for determining the change pattern described in FIG. 5E.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter is within 10 (step S4122; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the reach timing (step S4123). Whether or not it is the reach timing is variable in the ST state determined according to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the jackpot type determined by the jackpot type determination table 131 described with reference to FIG. It can be determined by the number of times of display. For example, in the jackpot 10 shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing is the 14th time, the 20th time, and the 39th time. In the process of step S4123, the CPU 103 determines that the reach timing is reached when the value of the fluctuation counter is 14, 20, or 39.

  In the process of step S4123, when it is determined that it is not the reach timing (step S4123; NO), the CPU 103 selects the determination table b (step S4127) and determines the variation category (step S4130). The determination table b is a determination table selected in the ST state at a timing that is not the set reach timing (timing at which reach is limited), and is a variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5B. Is to be selected.

  On the other hand, when determining that it is the reach timing (step S4123; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the reach timing is the super reach (step S4124). Whether or not it is super reach timing, the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and the number of times of variable display in the ST state determined according to the jackpot type determined by the jackpot type determination table 131, Can be judged by. For example, in the jackpot 10 shown in FIG. 7, the normal reach timing is the 14th time and the superreach timing is the 20th time and the 39th time. In the process of step S4124, the CPU 103 determines that it is not super reach timing when the value of the fluctuation counter is 14, and determines that it is super reach timing when the value of the fluctuation counter is 20 or 39.

  In the process of step S4124, when it is determined that it is not the super reach timing (step S4124; NO), the CPU 103 selects the determination table d (step S4126) and determines the variation category (step S4130). The determination table d is a determination table that is selected at the timing when the normal reach that is not the set super reach timing is determined in the ST state, and the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5D is selected. To do.

On the other hand, when determining that it is the super reach timing (step S4124; YES), the CPU 103 selects the determination table c (step S4125) and determines the variation category (step S4130). The determination table c is a determination table that is selected at the timing when the super reach is determined at the set super reach timing in the ST state, and the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5C is selected. To do.
This is the end of the description of the variation category determination using FIG.

Next, the details of the determination tables a to f used in the determination of the variation category in the process of step S4130, which is selected in the processes of steps S4125 to S4129 in FIG. 17, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 18A is the determination table a selected in the process of step S4129 of FIG. 18B is the determination table b selected in the process of step S4127 of FIG. 18C is the determination table c selected in the process of step S4125 of FIG. 18D is the determination table d selected in the process of step S4126 of FIG. 18E is the determination table e selected in the process of step S4128 of FIG. Further, FIG. 18F is an alternative determination table selected in place of the determination table b of FIG. 18B in the process of step S4127 of FIG.
The determination tables a to f can be stored in the ROM 101.

  18A to 18F, the determination tables a to f each include a plurality of variation category determination tables. The variation category determination table is selected based on the special figure display result (“miss” or “big hit”) determined in step S403 in FIG. 16 and the number of reserved memories (1, 2 or 3, or 4). That is, the CPU 103 selects one variation category determination table based on the special figure display result and the number of pending storages. The reserved storage number is based on, for example, a first reserved storage number count value which is a stored value of a first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  In FIG. 18A, the determination table a includes four types of variation category determination tables C-TBL11, C-TBL21, C-TBL31, and C-TBL41. In addition, in FIG. 18B, the determination table b includes four types of variation category determination tables C-TBL12, C-TBL22, C-TBL32, and C-TBL42. Further, in FIG. 18C, the determination table c includes four types of variation category determination tables C-TBL13, C-TBL23, C-TBL33, and C-TBL43. In addition, in FIG. 18D, the determination table d includes four types of variation category determination tables C-TBL14, C-TBL24, C-TBL34, and C-TBL44. In addition, in FIG. 18E, the determination table e includes four types of variation category determination tables C-TBL15, C-TBL25, C-TBL35, and C-TBL45. Further, in FIG. 18F, the determination table f includes four types of variation category determination tables C-TBL16, C-TBL26, C-TBL36, and C-TBL46.

  The determination table f is an alternative to the determination table b. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 17, in the process of step S4123, the determination table b is selected when the reach timing is not reached. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 19B, the determination table b is a determination table in which the super reach (loss) variation category PA4 or PA5 is not determined. However, in order to show a case where the effect of super-reach can be limited by the effect control CPU 120 even when the variation category PA4 or PA5 is determined, the determination table f in which the variation category PA4 can be determined is illustrated. Details of the processing of the effect control CPU 120 will be described later.

The CPU 103 selects any one of the variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 18 based on the selection of the determination table described in FIG. 17, the special figure display result, and the number of pending storages. For example, a case where the determination table a is selected in the process of step S4129 of FIG. 17 will be described. In FIG. 18A, when the special figure display result is a loss and the number of reservations is 1, the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table C-TBL11. Similarly, in FIG. 18A, when the special figure display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table C-TBL41.
18A to 18F, the case where the special figure display result is a big hit and the variation category determination table is selected regardless of the number of pending storages is illustrated. However, when the special figure display result is a big hit, different variation category determination tables may be selected according to the number of pending storages.
Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of pending storages is set to 4, and the number of pending storages is divided into three categories and the variable category determination table is selected. However, the maximum value of the number of reserved memories is not limited to 4. For example, the maximum value of the number of reserved memories can be set to 8. The classification of the number of reserved memories is not limited to three. For example, the number of reserved memories may be divided into two or four or more categories.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the variation category determination table is selected based on the special figure display result and the number of pending storages has been exemplified, but the variation category determination table may be selected under conditions other than the special figure display result and the number of pending storages. You may For example, the variation category determination table may be selected according to another game state such as a type of jackpot.
This is the end of the description of the determination table using FIG. 18.

  Next, the details of the variation category determination table selected in the processing described in FIGS. 17 and 18 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19A to 19F (hereinafter, abbreviated as “FIG. 19”). The CPU 103 determines the variation category in the process of step S4130 of FIG. 17 based on the selected variation category determination table and the random number value MR3.

First, a configuration example of the first variation category determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 19A.
The variation category determination tables C-TBL11 to C-TBL41 shown in FIGS. 19A (A) to 19 (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table a shown in FIG. 18 (A). 19A (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL11, FIG. 19A (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL21, and FIG. 19A (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL31. Also, FIG. 19A (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL 41.
The variation category determination table C-TBL11 to the variation category determination table C-TBL41 include variation categories and their contents, and allocation of a range of numerical values (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining variation categories, respectively. The variation category determined by the random number value MR3 is shown. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the special figure display result is a loss, the variation category is determined from five types of PA1 to PA5. When the special figure display result is a big hit, the variation category is determined from three types of PB3 to PB5.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL 11 shown in FIG. 19A (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 1. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL11, the determination value is not assigned to the variation category PA1 and the determination value of 0 to 69 is assigned to the variation category PA2 in the range of the determination values 0 to 99 of the random number value MR3. The variation category PA3 is assigned a determination value of 70 to 96, the variation category PA4 is assigned a determination value of 97 to 98, and the variation category PA5 is assigned a determination value of 99. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL11 in FIG. 19A (A), the variation category PA1 is 0%, the variation category PA2 is 70%, the variation category PA3 is 27%, the variation category PA4 is 2%, and the variation category PA4 is 2%. PA5 is determined at a rate of 1%.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL 21 shown in FIG. 19A (B) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 2 or 3. is there. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL21, the variation category PA1 is 0 to 3, the variation category PA2 is 4 to 88, the variation category PA3 is 89 to 96, and the variation category PA4 is 97 to 98. The determination value of 99 is assigned to the variation category PA5.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL 31 shown in FIG. 19A (C) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 4. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL31, the variation category PA1 is 0 to 63, the variation category PA2 is 64 to 88, the variation category PA3 is 89 to 96, and the variation category PA4 is 97 to 98. The determination value of 99 is assigned to the variation category PA5.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL 41 shown in FIG. 19A (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending storages. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL41, determination values of 0 to 19 are assigned to the variation category PB3, 20 to 59 to the variation category PB4, and 60 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB5.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the first variation category determination table using FIG. 19A.

Next, a configuration example of the second variation category determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 19B. In the following description, the description of the items described with reference to FIG. 19A will be omitted.
The variation category determination tables C-TBL12 to C-TBL42 shown in FIGS. 19B (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table b shown in FIG. 18 (B). 19B (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL12, FIG. 19B (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL22, and FIG. 19B (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL32. Also, FIG. 19B (D) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL 42.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the variation category determination table C-TBL 12 shown in FIG. 19B (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 1. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL12, the determination value of the random number value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the variation category PA2. On the other hand, no determination value is assigned to PA1 and PA3 to PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL12 is selected, the non-reach (miss) variation category PA2 is always determined.
Note that the determination table b is selected when the reach timing is not set in the ST state as described with reference to FIG. 17, and therefore, in the variation category determination table C-TBL12 to the determination table C-TBL42 selected from the determination table b. , The normal reach (miss) variation category PA3, and the super reach (loss) variation categories PA4 and PA5 are assigned with determination values so as not to be selected. Therefore, in the ST state, when the reach timing is not reached, the special figure display result is lost, and the special figure change time can be shortened, and the interest can be improved by improving the speed feeling of the special figure game.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the variation category determination table C-TBL 22 shown in FIG. 19B (B) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 2 or 3. is there. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL22, determination values of 0 to 19 are assigned to the variation category PA1 and 20 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA2. On the other hand, no determination value is assigned to the variation category PA3, the variation category PA4, and the variation category PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL22 is selected, the shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category PA1 or the non-reach (loss) variation category PA2 is determined. In the variation category determination table C-TBL22, the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, and compared with the variation category determination table C-TBL12 in which the number of pending storages is 1, the determination ratio of shortening / non-reach (miss) is increased. There is. By increasing the decision rate of shortening / non-reach (miss), the time for changing special maps can be shortened.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the variation category determination table C-TBL 32 shown in FIG. 19B (C) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 4. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL32, the determination values of 0 to 89 are assigned to the variation category PA1 and the determination values of 90 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA2. On the other hand, no determination value is assigned to the variation category PA3, the variation category PA4, and the variation category PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL32 is selected, the shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category PA1 or the non-reach (loss) variation category PA2 is determined. In the case of the variable category determination table C-TBL32, the number of pending storage is 4, the variable category determination table C-TBL12 in which the number of pending storage is 1 and the variable category determination table C-TBL22 in which the number of pending storage is 2 or 3 Compared with this, the ratio of decision to shorten / non-reach (miss) is increasing. By increasing the decision rate of shortening / non-reach (miss), the time for changing special maps can be shortened.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the variation category determination table C-TBL 42 shown in FIG. 19B (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending storages. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL42, the determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB4, and the determination values are not assigned to the variation categories PB3 and PB5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 42 is selected and the special figure display result is a big hit, the variation category of the super reach α is selected.
According to the variation category determination table described with reference to FIG. 19B, when the reach timing is not in the ST state, non-reach is determined when the special figure display result is lost, and super reach α is executed when the jackpot is a big hit. Will be done. Therefore, when the special map display result is lost, the special map change time is shortened to increase the speed of the special map game, and when the special map display result is a big hit, super reach is decided to improve the interest. Can be planned.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the second variation category determination table using FIG. 19B.

Next, a configuration example of the third variation category determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 19C.
The variation category determination tables C-TBL13 to C-TBL43 shown in FIGS. 19C (A) to 19 (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table c shown in FIG. 18 (C). 19C (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL13, FIG. 19C (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL23, and FIG. 19C (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL33. Further, FIG. 19C (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL43.

As shown in FIG. 18C, the variation category determination table C-TBL 13 shown in FIG. 19C (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 1. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL13, the determination value of the random number value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the variation category PA4. On the other hand, no determination value is assigned to PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL13 is selected, the variation category PA4 of the super reach α (miss) is always determined.
Since the determination table c is selected at the reach timing of the super reach in the ST state as described in FIG. 17, the variation category determination tables C-TBL13 to C-TBL33 selected from the determination table c are selected. In, even if the special figure display result is a loss, the variation category PA4 of the super reach α (loss) is always determined. By executing the reach timing of super reach α (miss) at a predetermined reach timing, it is possible to set the upper limit number of executions in the reach production corresponding to super reach α in the ST state, and execution of super reach α By increasing the expectation of a big hit depending on the number of times, it is possible to improve the interest.

  The variation category determination table C-TBL23 shown in FIG. 19C (B) and the variation category determination table C-TBL33 shown in FIG. 19C (C) are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL13. That is, when the determination table c is selected, the variation category PA4 is always determined and the effect corresponding to the super reach α is executed when the special figure display result is a loss. Since the variation category determination table C-TBL23 and the variation category determination table C-TBL33 are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL13, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 18C, the variation category determination table C-TBL 43 shown in FIG. 19C (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL43, the determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB4, and the determination values are not assigned to the variation categories PB3 and PB5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL43 is selected and the special figure display result is a big hit, the variation category of the super reach α is selected.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the third variation category determination table using FIG. 19C.

Next, a configuration example of the fourth variation category determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 19D.
The variation category determination tables C-TBL14 to C-TBL44 shown in FIGS. 19D (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table d shown in FIG. 18 (D). 19D (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL14, FIG. 19D (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL24, and FIG. 19D (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL34. Further, FIG. 19D (D) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL44.

As shown in FIG. 18D, the variation category determination table C-TBL 14 shown in FIG. 19D (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of reserved memories is 1. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL14, the determination value of the random number value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the variation category PA3. On the other hand, no determination value is assigned to PA1, PA2, PA4, and PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL14 is selected, the variation category PA3 of normal reach (miss) is always determined.
Since the determination table d is selected at the reach timing of the normal reach in the ST state, as described with reference to FIG. 17, in the variation category determination tables C-TBL14 to C-TBL34 selected from the determination table d. Indicates that the normal reach (miss) variation category PA3 is always determined even if the special figure display result is lost. By executing the reach timing of the normal reach (miss) at the predetermined reach timing, it is possible to set the upper limit number of times of the reach production in combination with the production of the super reach α in the ST state, and the number of times of the reach production is executed. By increasing the expectation of a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest.

  The variation category determination table C-TBL24 shown in FIG. 19D (B) and the variation category determination table C-TBL34 shown in FIG. 19D (C) are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL14. That is, when the determination table d is selected, the variation category PA3 is always determined and the effect corresponding to the normal reach is executed when the special figure display result is a loss. Since the variation category determination table C-TBL24 and the variation category determination table C-TBL34 are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL14, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 18D, the variation category determination table C-TBL 44 shown in FIG. 19D (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is a big hit regardless of the number of pending storages. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL44, the determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB3, and the determination values are not assigned to the variation categories PB4 and PB5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL44 is selected and the special figure display result is a big hit, the variation category of normal reach is selected.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the fourth variation category determination table using FIG. 19D.

Next, a configuration example of the fifth variation category determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 19E.
The variation category determination tables C-TBL15 to C-TBL45 shown in FIGS. 19E (A) to 19 (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table e shown in FIG. 18 (E). 19E (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL15, FIG. 19E (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL25, and FIG. 19E (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL35. Further, FIG. 19E (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL45.

As shown in FIG. 18E, the variation category determination table C-TBL 15 shown in FIG. 19E (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 1. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL15, the determination value of the random number MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the variation category PA1. On the other hand, no determination value is assigned to PA2, PA3, PA4, and PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL15 is selected, the shortened / non-reach (miss) variation category PA1 is always determined.
As described with reference to FIG. 17, since the number of fluctuations in the ST state is selected within 10 times in the determination table e, in the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL15 to the determination table C-TBL35 selected from the determination table e. Always determines the shortened / non-reach (miss) variation category PA1. When the number of fluctuations in the ST state is within 10 times and the special map display result is lost, the special map change time is shortened 10 times in a row, and the sense of speed is improved to improve the interest. it can.

  The variation category determination table C-TBL25 shown in FIG. 19E (B) and the variation category determination table C-TBL35 shown in FIG. 19E (C) are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL15. That is, when the determination table e is selected, the variation category PA1 is always determined and the effect corresponding to shortening / non-reach is executed when the special figure display result is a loss. The variation category determination table C-TBL25 and the variation category determination table C-TBL35 are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL15, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 18E, the variation category determination table C-TBL 45 shown in FIG. 19E (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending storages. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL45, the determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB1, and the determination values are not assigned to the variation categories PB4 and PB5. As for the effect corresponding to PB1, the immediate hit effect is executed as described in FIG. 5E. By executing the immediate hit effect when the number of fluctuations in the ST state is within 10 times, the sense of speed can be improved and the interest can be improved.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the fifth variation category determination table using FIG. 19E.

Next, a configuration example of the sixth variation category determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 19F.
The variation category determination tables C-TBL16 to C-TBL46 shown in FIGS. 19F (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table f shown in FIG. 18 (F). 19F (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL16, FIG. 19F (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL26, and FIG. 19F (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL36. Further, FIG. 19F (D) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL 46.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL 16 shown in FIG. 19F (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 1. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL16, the determination values of the random number MR3 of 0 to 69 are assigned to the variation category PA2 and 70 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA4. On the other hand, the judgment values are not assigned to PA1, PA3, and PA5.
In addition, when the variation category PA4 is determined based on the variation category determination table C-TBL16, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pseudo continuous effect instead of executing the effect of the super reach α, and executes the reach effect. Perform processing to prohibit. The processing content of the effect control CPU 120 will be described later.
As described with reference to FIG. 17, the determination table f is selected instead of the determination table b when the reach timing is not in the ST state, but the variation category determination table C-TBL16 to which is selected from the determination table f. In the decision table C-TBL46, the variation category PA4 of the super reach α (miss) is decided. Even when the variation category PA4 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 restricts the effect of super-reach, so that the effect of super-reach can be substantially not executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the upper limit number of times of execution of the reach effect, and it is possible to improve interest by increasing the expectation of a big hit depending on the number of times of execution of the reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL 26 shown in FIG. 19F (B) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 2 or 3. is there. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 26, the determination values of 0 to 3 are assigned to the variation category PA1, 4 to 88 are assigned to the variation category PA2, and 89 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA4. Similar to the variation category determination table C-TBL16, the determination values are not assigned to the variation categories PA3 and PA5.
In the variation category determination table C-TBL26, the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, and the decision ratio of shortening / non-reach (miss) is increased as compared with the case of the variation category determination table C-TBL16 in which the number of pending storages is 1. There is. By increasing the decision rate of shortening / non-reach (miss), the time for changing special maps can be shortened.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL 36 shown in FIG. 19F (C) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is lost and the number of pending storage is 4. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 36, the determination values of 0 to 63 are assigned to the variation category PA1, 64 to 88 to the variation category PA2, and 89 to 99 to the variation category PA4. Similar to the variation category determination table C-TBL16, the determination values are not assigned to the variation categories PA3 and PA5.
In the case of the variable category determination table C-TBL36, the number of pending storage is 4, the variable category determination table C-TBL16 in which the number of pending storage is 1 and the variable category determination table C-TBL26 in which the number of pending storage is 2 or 3 Compared with this, the ratio of decision to shorten / non-reach (miss) is increasing. By increasing the decision rate of shortening / non-reach (miss), the time for changing special maps can be shortened.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL 46 shown in FIG. 19F (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special figure display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending storages. . The setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 46 is the same as the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 42 described with reference to FIG.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the sixth variation category determination table using FIG. 19F.

  This is the end of the description of the start winning determination process of step S101 in FIG. 13 using FIGS. 14 to 19F.

  Returning to FIG. 13 again, after executing the start winning determination process of step S101, the CPU 103 performs one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select and execute.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to "big hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting processing includes processing for determining the fluctuation pattern as any of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first fluctuation start command (or second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command. It includes a send setting process for sending etc. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning award process, as in step S412 of the award random number determination process. Then, based on the variation category that is the determination result, one of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101 is selected as the variation table to be set as the usage table. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the newly extracted numerical value data indicating the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination. The fluctuation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, in addition to the extraction of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored, so that the variation pattern setting process of step S111 The variation pattern may be determined using the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, which is stored in the starting winning process.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, It is a first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by 1 special symbol display device 4A, or a second special figure game (special feature using the second special figure) by second special symbol display device 4B. A common timer measures elapsed time regardless of whether the game is a (figure game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. In addition, if the game state is other than the low accurate low base state (normal mode), that is, the special symbol stop processing in the case of one or both of the probability change state (high accuracy state) and the time saving state (high base state) , A process of adding or resetting the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, a special figure in the probability variation state (high-precision state), a special figure in the number of times the game is executed, and a time saving state (high base state) Process to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been run has reached a predetermined number of times, and to control the probability variation state (high-precision state) and / or the time-shortening state (high base state) to either or both The game state transition process at the time of change such as the process of setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, and when the big hit flag is in the on state, the value of the special figure process flag is "4". Will be updated. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is a processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set depending on whether the big hit type is “16R certainty big hit” or “8R certainty big hit”. As an example, the jackpot type corresponds to "16R probability variation jackpot", the upper limit of the period for which the jackpot is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the jackpot opening that is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is opened. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, in response to the big hit type "8R probability variation big hit", the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the number of times the big winning opening is opened, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting to “8 times”, it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, after the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". .

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum number is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp 9. It includes a process for waiting until and a jackpot after-game state transition process, which will be described later, for performing settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  20 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is held. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

  When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. As the data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updated, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151B are shifted upward by one entry. Yes (step S233). In the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored by the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good.

  As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special figure pending storage is “0”, and therefore the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game and the game are suspended, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to a mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the 1st special figure reservation storage unit 151A. As data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Following the process of step S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, for example, and updated, and the first special figure reserved storage is also updated. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A are shifted upward by one entry. Yes (step S237). Further, in the processing of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for deciding whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a “big hit” or “miss”, Similar to the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in 16 (A), the data of the display result determination table is set (step S239). When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table and second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the processing of step S402, the starting opening buffer is used. Although the value ("1" or "2") is referred to, in the process of step S239, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value ("1" or "2") may be referred to.

  Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the decision value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" and "miss". Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “miss” (step S240).

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S241). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this manner, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is set for each of the “16R probability variable jackpot” and the “8R probability variable jackpot”. Depending on which of the determination values assigned to the big hit type matches, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S244).

  In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the jackpot type determined Memorize As an example, if the big hit type is “16R certainty variation big hit”, the big hit type buffer value is “1”, and if “8R certainty variation big hit”, it may be “2”.

  When it is determined that it is not a "big hit" in step S241 (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processing in step S245, a pre-determined result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further, Corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, the fixed special symbol is set (step S248).

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. . If the number of stored memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; YES), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S250), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is controlled from the main board 11. It is determined whether it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.
This is the end of the description of the special symbol normal processing in step S110 using FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 13 again, in the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 uses the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination and the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination to change patterns. To decide.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined using the random number value MR3 as in the winning random number determination process (step S220), but the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed. Even when the number of reserved memories is significantly different between the time and the execution of the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the random number value MR3 extracted in the winning random number determination process is the same determination in the variation pattern setting process. The value is used.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern.
The setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 21 is applied when the variation category is determined using the variation category determination table shown in FIG. 19A. That is, the setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern shown in 21 is applied when it is determined that the ST state is not set in step S4121 described in FIG. For example, in the diagrams illustrating the variation categories and the variation patterns described in FIGS. 5B to 5F, the case where only one variation pattern is set in one variation category is illustrated. Therefore, in the ST state, it is not necessary to determine the variation pattern by the random number value MR5. However, when two or more variation patterns are set for one variation category in FIGS. 5B to 5F, the setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern described below may be applied.
Further, it is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of fluctuation pattern determination tables corresponding to the fluctuation categories. FIG. 21A is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 21B is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (miss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 21C is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 21D to 19H.

  22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big hit start effect waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S292, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the big hit start effect waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S292, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the hit start designation command is the buffer designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the area. After that, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs the gaming state transition process at the time of fluctuation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation game state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the variation game state transition process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current game state is the low accurate low base state (step S451). When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are off, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the low accuracy low base state. When it is determined in step S451 that the current game state is the low-probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the variation game state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low accurate low base state is not set (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The fluctuation number counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low accurate low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the time saving number. The number of STs (probability variation number) is the number of executions of the special figure game that executes the probability variation control. The number of times saved is the number of executions of a special figure game that executes time saving control. The number of STs (the number of probable changes) and the number of time reductions are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 13 and 24).

  Following the processing of step S452, the CPU 103 reads the ST number (probability variation number) (step S453) and the time saving number (step S454). Following the processing of step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the highly accurate state (probably changed state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the highly accurate state. When it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is the highly accurate state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is the value indicated by the ST number (probability variation number) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than (for example, 50 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter is greater than the value indicated by the ST number (probability variation number) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Then, the game state is set to the low-probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control ends.

  After executing the processing of step S457 or when determining that the current gaming state is not the highly accurate state (step S455; NO), the value of the fluctuation number counter is a value larger than the value indicated by the ST number (probable variation number). When it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current game state is the high base state (time saving state) (step S458). The CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time saving state) when the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state. When it is determined in step S458 that the current game state is the high base state (time saving state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is the value indicated by the time saving number read in step S454. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than (for example, 50 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turns it off. By doing so, the gaming state is set to the low base state (step S460), and the time saving control is ended.

  After performing the processing of step S460 or when it is determined that the current game state is not the high base state (time saving state) (step S458; NO), the value of the fluctuation number counter is not a value larger than the value indicated by the number of time saving. When it is determined that (step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state is the low-probability low-base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the game state is the low probability low base state.

  When it is determined in step S461 that the low accurate low base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST number (probability change number) to "0" (step S462), and sets the time saving number. The value is cleared to "0" (step S463), and the value of the variation counter is cleared to "0" (step S464).

  After executing the processing of step S464, the CPU 103 executes reach timing setting clear for clearing the reach timing setting (step S465). The reach timing is set in the game control counter setting unit 154 of FIG. 8 based on the jackpot type determination table described in FIG. 7. In the process of step S465, the CPU 103 clears the reach timing set in the game control counter setting unit 154. The reach timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After performing the process of step S465, or when it is determined in step S461 that the low accurate low base state is not set (step S461; NO), the variation game state transition process without executing steps S462, S463, and S464. To finish.
This is the end of the description of the variation-time game state transition process of step S296 using FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit ending process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial set in advance corresponding to the production waiting time at the end of the jackpot is set. The value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates the game control process timer value by, for example, subtracting 1, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. It may be determined whether or not the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed, depending on whether or not.

  If the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has not elapsed in step S311, (NO in step S311), the CPU 103 directly ends the big hit end process. On the other hand, when the big hit end time production waiting time has elapsed in step S311, (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state or the like to set the highly accurate state (probability variation state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state or the like to set the high base state (step S315). That is, by the processing of step S314 and step S315, at the end of the big hit game state, the game state is set to the highly accurate high base state.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) to 50 times (step S316), and sets the time saving number to 50 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the variation counter to "0" (step S318) and clears the value of the special figure process flag to "0" (step S319).

After executing the process of step S319, the CPU 103 sets the reach timing (step S320). The reach timing determines the number of fluctuations for executing the reach effect described with reference to FIG. 7, and is determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S409 in the winning random number determination process (step S220) of FIG. It is determined based on the type of jackpot. Based on the determined jackpot type, the CPU 103 sets the reach timing shown in FIG. 7 in the game control counter setting unit 154.
In the present embodiment, the case where the reach timing is always set after the jackpot is finished and the reach timing is set is illustrated. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the jackpot is over, the ST state can be set. In that case, the process for setting the reach timing in step S320 may be executed when the ST state is entered.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the process of setting the reach timing is executed in the big hit ending process of step S117 has been exemplified, but the process of setting the reach timing is not limited to the big hit ending process. For example, in the determination of whether the big hit flag in step S291 in the special symbol stop process (step S113) is on, the process for setting the reach timing may be executed when the big hit flag is on. .
After executing the process of step S320, the CPU 103 ends the big hit ending process of step S117.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) and the shortening number of 50 times are set to the same value (50 times each), but the set value of the ST number (probable variation number) and The number of times may be different from the set value of 50 times. Further, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit may be the same value (both 50 times). Further, the set value of the number of STs (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit may be different values. Further, the set value of the time saving number in the case of the 8R certainty variation big hit and the setting value of the time saving number in the case of the 16R certain variation big hit may be the same value (both 50 times). Further, the set value of the number of shortening times in the case of 8R certainty variation big hit and the setting value of the number of shortening times in the case of 16R certain variation big hit may be different values. It should be noted that the CPU 103 determines that the 16R probability variable jackpot is the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, and determines that the big hit type buffer value is "2". May be judged to be the 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process of step S101, the transmission setting for transmitting the start mouth winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 is performed ( (Step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the special figure display result determined in step S403, etc. is performed (step S410), and the variation category command according to the variation category determined in step S412. Is set (step S413), and the transmission setting for sending the pending storage count notification command is made (step S221). After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11, the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), a symbol designation command, Four commands, a variable category command and a reserved storage number notification command (a first reserved storage number notification command or a second reserved storage number notification command), are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

  Further, in the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like. Is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designating command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, and the like, Transmission settings for transmission to the production control board 12 are performed. By executing the command control process of the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, when the variable display is started, the variable display result notification command or Fluctuation pattern designation commands, etc., are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to being transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control processing of step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  In other words, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process (step S110) controls the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to be a big hit game state. Whether or not it is determined, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined, and the content determined by each effect control command is determined. It is transmitted to the production control board 12. In addition, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), by the random number determination process at the time of winning (step S220), as a "big hit" It is determined whether or not it is controlled to a big hit game state, a rough variable display mode (variation category) of a decorative pattern is determined, and the content determined by each production control command is transmitted to the production control board 12. To be done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, both the ST number (probability variation number) and the shortened number of times are 50 times, the game state is high precision high base Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is incremented in each variation when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-accuracy state when the variation counter exceeds the ST count (probability variation count). Is set (step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the fluctuation counter exceeds the number of times saved (step S460).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt which is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control such as a performance control command is performed from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When the timer interrupt flag is in the on state in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S73), and the command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the produced control commands are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, the effect control process process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process process of step S75, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. With respect to the control content of the production operation using, the determination, the determination, the setting, etc. are performed according to the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S75, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S76), and effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored content of the effect control command reception buffer to confirm that the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is received. It is determined whether there is any (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process ends.

  When there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 confirms the MODE data of the received command, for example.

  When there is a received command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a power failure recovery process (step S520). Details of the power failure recovery process of step S520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a power failure recovery process.

In FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S5201). As described with reference to FIG. 11, the power failure recovery designation command (9200H) causes the main board 11 to produce control board 12 when the predetermined condition (steps SS007 to S009) is satisfied after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S44). When transmitting the power failure recovery designation command, the CPU 103 is assumed to be able to transmit the plurality of commands described in FIG. 3 together. In the present embodiment, as the command transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command, a game state designation command (95XXH), a special winning opening opening notification command (A1XXH), a special winning opening after-opening notification command (A2XXH), a reserved memory A case where the number notification command (C1XX, C2XX) is transmitted will be described. The command transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command is not limited to the above. For example, the reach timing designation command for designating the reach timing 1 to the reach timing 3 described with reference to FIG. 7 may be transmitted. Since the received command is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, the effect control CPU 120 operates. In the following process, the command received from the effect control command receiving buffer is read.
If the received command is not the power failure recovery designation command (step S5201; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the power failure recovery process of step S520.

  On the other hand, when the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S5201; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes recovery processing by the received command in steps S5202 to S5206.

First, when the received command includes the game state designation command (95XXH), the effect control CPU 120 performs a restoration process according to the game state designation command (step S5202). The game state designation command includes a plurality of types of commands for designating the game state of the gaming machine 1 as described with reference to FIG. For example, when the time saving state designation command (9501H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 can restore the effect device to the setting of the effect device according to the time saving state. In addition, when the probability variation state designation command (9502H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 can restore the effect device to the setting of the effect device according to the probability variation state.
In the process of step S5202, when the probability variation state designation command is received, it indicates that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 was the probability variation state (ST state) before the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was stopped. When the probability control state designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process for restoring the reach history display, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the case where the probability variation state designation command is received together with the power failure recovery designation command is illustrated. However, the reception of the probability variation state designation command does not have to be confirmed in the power failure recovery process of step S520. The effect control CPU 120 may execute, for example, a determination as to whether or not the probability variation state designation command has been received in the variable display start setting process of step S171 described in FIG.

  After the processing of step S5202, if the received command includes the special winning opening opening notification command (A1XXH), the effect control CPU 120 performs recovery processing according to the special winning opening opening notification command. (Step S5203). After the processing of step S5203, the effect control CPU 120, if the received command includes the notification command after opening the special winning opening (A2XXH), performs a recovery process according to the notification command after opening the special winning opening. (Step S5204). After the execution of the process of step S5204, the effect control CPU 120, if the received command includes the reserved storage number notification command (C1XXH or C2XXH), performs the recovery process according to the reserved storage number notification command (step S5203). After the process of step S5205, if the received command includes other effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 performs a recovery process according to the effect control command (step S5203). The effect control command received in step S5206 is the other command described in FIG. 3 or another command, and the type of the command is arbitrary.

After executing the process of step S5206, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the power failure recovery flag (step S5207). The power failure recovery flag is a flag that records the reception of the power failure recovery designation command, and indicates that the power failure is being recovered in the ON state. In the present embodiment, the variable display restoration process including the reach history display setting process for restoring the reach history display and displaying the image again on the image display device 5, which will be described later, is exemplified as the power failure restoration process. The power failure recovery flag shall be turned off when it is executed. However, the power failure recovery flag may be turned off when another power failure recovery process is executed.
This is the end of the description of the power failure recovery process of step S520 using FIG.

  Again returning to FIG. 26, after executing the process of step S520, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the first starting mouth winning designation command (step S502). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning award designation command (step S502; YES), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Good.

  When the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (step S504). Then, when the command is the second starting opening winning award designation command (step S504; YES), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that has been determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command.

  When the received command is not the second starting mouth winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). When the received command is not the symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the variation category command (step S507). When the received command is not the variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508). Then, when the command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508; YES), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  When the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510; YES), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After any one of the processing of step 1) is executed, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of step S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command is After storing at the beginning of an empty area in the 1-start winning command buffer 194A (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  Further, when the received command is the symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is the variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or in steps S503, S505, S509. , S511, after the execution of any of the processing of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of step S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, Is stored at the beginning of an empty area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and then the process returns to step S501.

  In addition, when the first reserved storage number notification command is received together with the first fluctuation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning-time reception command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved storage number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the second start prize winning time reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second starting winning time reception command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; NO), settings are made according to the other received commands (step S513), and then the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the game state designation command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not it is a time saving.

  Starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command or second starting mouth winning designation command), symbol designating command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number The effect control command received from the main board 11 when the start winning is generated, such as the notification command, is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved storage number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, the first starting mouth winning designation command, and the second starting mouth winning designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designating command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A, whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a first reserved memory number notification command The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of an empty area in the corresponding storage area.

Further, when the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a second reserved storage number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of an empty area in the corresponding storage area.
This is the end of the description of the command analysis process in step S74 using FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing executed in step S75 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize time effect determination process (step S150). In the effect determination process at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning prize receiving command buffer (the first starting winning prize receiving command buffer 194A or the second starting winning prize receiving command buffer 194B). The process of determining whether or not the start mouth winning award designation command is received as the received command, and the display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when additionally displaying the start winning award memory display area 5H are determined. Processing is performed.

  After executing the winning effect determination process of step S150, any one of the following processes of steps S170 to 177 is performed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether or not the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern on the display device 5, a process of displaying a process of executing a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display), and the like. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. Process to determine the fixed decorative pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result in order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, and the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted to be active. The display area AHA includes a process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display, a process of determining various effects (for example, a main notice effect), and the like. There is. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Then, various control data is read out and various effect control (for example, variable display control of decorative pattern during variable display of decorative pattern) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen based on the read control data (process data), and controls the effect sound signal by voice. Various performance controls such as control for outputting to the board 13 to output a sound effect from the speaker 8 and control for outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / blink the lamp 9 are executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the fixed decorative design (final stop design) which is the variable display result of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to autonomously derive and display the finalized decorative design on the side of the production control board 12 to finalize the variable display result. When the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". This special figure winning waiting process, the number of ST (probability change number) and the process of counting the number of time saved, the process of updating the value of the effect number counter, the process of changing the game state according to the value of the effect number counter, etc. Can be included. In this special figure hit waiting process, when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to "4", and the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". This big hit start process is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a process for executing a fanfare effect, or an effect executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, It includes processing for setting effects corresponding to normal songs and effects corresponding to special songs. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

  The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The processing during this round is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) And the effect that is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or an effect corresponding to a special song) is set. It includes processing to do. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6".

  The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". This post-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state. When the special winning opening opening notification command from the main board 11 is received, an effect executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The production process flag is updated to "5". When the hit end designation command from the main board 11 is received, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7".

  The post-big hit completion process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". This post-hit end process is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, a process for executing an ending effect, a process for setting a game state, a ST number (probable variation number), and a shortened number of times are set. Processing, etc. can be included. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first fluctuation start command (or the second fluctuation start command) has been received (step S1000).

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first fluctuation start command (or the second fluctuation start command) is not received (step S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the demonstration effect flag is in the on state. The determination is made (step S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration effect flag is in the on state (for example, the value "1"), it means that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration effect flag is in the off state (for example, the value "0"). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not in the on state (step S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (step S1004). When it is determined in step S1004 that the customer waiting demo designation command has not been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1004 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration effect flag is set to the on state (step S1006), and the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display) is set. The selected process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and the effect control process timer is started (step S1010). As a result, the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display) is started based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.
After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.
In the present embodiment, as a condition for starting the demonstration effect, the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is described as a case where it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo designation command is received. However, the demonstration effect is started. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in the game state by using a sensor or the like.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, when the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, the stick controller 31A). It is determined whether or not there is a predetermined operation using the or push button 31B or the like (step S1012). When it is determined in step S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (step S1012; NO), the variable display start waiting process is ended. That is, the demonstration production is continued.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect adjustment display (step S1013).

The effect adjustment display is an aspect of effect adjusting means. In the production adjustment display, the production means is adjusted by "display". The effect adjustment display is executed, for example, by displaying an icon or the like indicating the setting status of the effect means on the display screen of the image display device 5.
The rendering means is, for example, sound output means such as the speaker 8 and light emitting means such as the LED 9. When the effect production means is a sound output means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, an icon display for volume adjustment displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the production means is a light emitting means, the production adjustment display is, for example, an icon display for brightness adjustment displayed on the image display device 5.
While visually confirming the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the player uses, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B described in FIG. , Adjust the brightness, etc.

  Appropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like as the production means and appropriate brightness of the LED 9 as the production means improve the production effect for the player. On the other hand, an inappropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like or an inappropriate brightness of the LED 9 may give a player a disadvantage such as an unpleasant feeling.

The effect adjustment display is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 based on the process data described in FIG. That is, the control contents of the production operation such as display, change, and deletion of the production adjustment display are preset in the process data. For example, in the process data, it is possible to set the control content for displaying the setting status of the volume and brightness of the rendering means by an icon or the like. In addition, in the process data, control contents for changing the effect adjustment display (increase / decrease of volume display, etc.) when the player operates the push button 31B, the cross key, or the like to change the setting of the volume and the brightness should be set. You can Further, the process data includes control contents for deleting the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the player operates the push button 31B, the cross key, or the like, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. Can be set.
After executing the processing of step S1013, the variable display start waiting processing (step S170) ends.

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has been received (step S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the demonstration effect flag is in the on state. The determination is made (step S1022). When it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, when the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026), and the variable display start waiting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1022; NO), the process of step S1024 is omitted (skipping), and the value of the effect process flag is set to the variable display start setting process. After updating the value to "1" which is the value (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, thereby causing the special figure display result to be “missed”. Or not (step S522).

  When it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss” in step S522 (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) forming the loss combination (step). S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to the predetermined left fixed design determination table, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative design is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the right fixed decorative pattern which is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative patterns is determined. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the middle fixed decorative design which is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative designs is determined. In addition, in the process of step S524, the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined chance pattern may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol announcement is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (step S522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is "big hit (16R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 Determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol) that constitute a jackpot combination (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol which is updated by a random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determination symbol determination table or the like, the display is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. Decorative designs with the same design number are determined.

  When determining the combination of the fixed decorative symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the type of big hit (16R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit), presence or absence of promotion effect, and the like. You may decide a design.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R certainty variation big hits (for example, three odd-numbered identical decorative patterns are lined up) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R certainty variation big hits (for example, even numbered identical decorative patterns are In the aspect in which 3 pieces are arranged side by side, in the case of 16R certainty variation big hit, either the big hit combination dedicated to the 16R certainty variation big hit or the combination of the big hits dedicated to the 8R certainty variation big hit may be determined as the fixed decorative pattern. . At this time, when the jackpot combination dedicated to the 8R certainty variation jackpot is determined as the fixed decorative design, it is sufficient to notify that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is a winning effect until the end of the eighth round as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R certainty variation big hit, it is sufficient to determine whether the combination of the 8R certainty variation big hits is a big hit combination as the fixed decorative design.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variable big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variable big hit (probability) is provided and the special figure display result is “big hit (2R probability variable big hit (probability))”, the production control CPU120 for may determine the combination of the fixed decorative design (final stop design) corresponding to 2R probability variation big hit (actual probability).

  After performing either the process of step S524 or the process of step S528, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display restoration process (step S529). In the variable display restoration process, after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, the production mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern including the restoration of the reach history display is restored. It is a process to make. The variable display restoration process in step S529 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display restoration process.
In FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the power failure recovery flag is in the ON state. The power failure recovery flag is turned on by the power failure recovery flag ON processing of step S5207 of the power failure recovery processing (step S520) of FIG. That is, the power failure recovery flag is a flag that is turned on when the power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 11.
When it is determined that the power failure recovery flag is not in the on state (step S520; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display recovery process of step S529.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery flag is in the on state (step S520; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the power failure recovery flag in the off state (step S5292). After executing the processing of step S5292, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display restoration processing (step S5293). The variable display restoration process displays an image based on information such as the game state, the special winning opening state, and the number of reserved memories set in the process of step S5202 to step S5206 in the power failure restoration process (step S520) of FIG. This is to restore the effect screen displayed on the device 5, and may include restoring the display screen such as the background image when displaying the reach history in the ST state described later.

After executing the processing of step S5293, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the ST state (step S5294). Whether or not it is in the ST state is determined by whether or not the received game state designation command (probability variation state designation command 9502H) is recorded in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. You can
When determining that it is not in the ST state (step S5294; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display restoration process of step S529.

On the other hand, when determining that it is in the ST state (step S5294; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach history display setting for restoring the reach history (step S5295). The reach history display setting processing in step S5295 sets an effect control pattern used in the reach history display effect described later with reference to FIG. The reach history display effect for displaying the reach history is an effect mode in which the player is informed that the super reach is performed when the effect of the super reach (α) is executed when the game state is the ST state. is there. For example, when there are four types of super-reach (α) effect modes (for example, images displayed on the image display device 5), the reach history is displayed in a predetermined manner in the performed (already performed) effect mode, The player is informed of the effect mode of the reaper reach α that has been performed and the effect mode of the reaper reach α that has not been performed. By displaying the reach history, the player can confirm the executed super reach effect, and the interest can be improved.
In the reach history display effect, similar to the effect of super reach, the effect using the effect device is executed based on the effect control pattern that is set. The rendering device is, for example, a movable member included in the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the rendering model. That is, in the reach history display effect, the image display using the image display device 5, the sound output using the speaker 8, the lighting display using the lamp 9, and the operation of the movable member of the effect model are performed alone or in combination. Shall be executed.

  If the production control board 12 does not back up the data for displaying the reach history, the data for displaying the reach history will be lost if the electric power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted and the power failure recovery designation command and the probability variation state designation command are received, the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting for restoring the reach history in the process of step S5295.

In the present embodiment, the case where the reach history display setting process is executed in the variable display restoration process of step S529 of the variable display start process (step S171) has been illustrated. However, the process of the reach history display setting may be executed, for example, in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) executed after receiving the first fluctuation start command (or the second fluctuation start command) described in FIG. May be.
This is the end of the description of the variable display restoration process of step S529 using FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 30 again, after performing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 performs the hold digestion process (step S530). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, the special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the first special drawing game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the first special drawing game), the first start winning prize memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL). Is displayed).

  More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Further, in the process of step S530, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be exhausted in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, the other hold display is first displayed. When the starting winning award memory display area 5HL shifts, and when the second starting winning award memory display area 5HR has a hold display in addition to the active display, the other holding display is shifted in the second starting award memory display area 5HR.

  After executing the hold digestion process in step S530, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern set process (step S532). In the process of effect control pattern setting, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is set as a use pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Details of the effect control pattern set in step S532 will be described with reference to FIG.

32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control pattern set.
In FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the ST state (step S5321). Whether or not it is in the ST state is determined by recording the probability variation state designation command received in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, similarly to the process of step S5294 described in FIG. It is possible to judge by whether or not The process of step S5294 is executed only once when the power is restored, whereas the process of step S5321 is repeatedly executed even when the power is not restored.

When determining that it is not in the ST state (step S5321; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (step S5322). To set the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is to set an effect control pattern that is not the effect control pattern for executing the specific effect set in the processing of steps S5326 and S5328 described below. .
The effect control pattern set in step S5322 may include process data for executing variable display of small symbols exemplified as special identification information corresponding to variable display of identification information. The small design means that the decorative design displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the decorative design is being variably displayed. For example, when the small design interferes with the display of the decorative design by displaying a predetermined image with a predetermined effect on the image display device 5, the decorative design is reduced to a part of the image display device 5 instead of the decorative design. It is displayed and displayed. By displaying the small design, it is possible to make the player recognize that the decorative design is being variably displayed even when the decorative design cannot be displayed due to the predetermined effect. The process data for executing the variable display of the small symbols may be included in the effect control pattern of the predetermined effect set in step S529.

On the other hand, when determining that it is in the ST state (step S5321; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change is super reach (step S5323). Whether or not it is the super reach can be determined by the variation pattern included in the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 5, the variation pattern corresponding to super reach α is transmitted when not in the ST state.
When it is determined that it is not the super reach (step S5323; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern set processing corresponding to the variation pattern of step S5322.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the super reach (step S5323; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the reach timing (step S5324). Whether or not it is the reach timing may be determined by, for example, receiving a reach timing designation command indicating the reach timing together with the power failure recovery designation command. If the reach timing designation command is not used, the effect control CPU 120 cannot know the reach timing. Therefore, when the reach timing designation command is not used, it is assumed that the reach timing is reached. Whether or not to use the reach timing designation command can be set in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191.

  When it is determined that it is the reach timing (step S5324; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect type determination process for determining the type of the super reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach α (step S5325). ). Details of the reach effect type determination in step S5325 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the reach effect type determination in step S5325.
In FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach history reading process of reading the reach history (step S5325). The reach history reading process executed in step S5325 is a process of reading the reach history recording that the production of the super reach is executed when the game state is the ST state. In the reach history, for example, whether or not the reach effect type is executed (is executed) for each reach effect type described later with reference to FIG. 34 is recorded. The reach history may be recorded in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 described with reference to FIG. 10A, and in the process of step S5325, the reach history recorded in the effect control flag setting unit 191 may be read. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine which reach effect type has been executed by reading the reach history.

  After executing the processing of step S53251, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach effect type (step S53252). In the process for determining the reach effect type in step S53252, one reach effect type determination ratio table is selected from the reach history read in the process in step S53251, and the determination set in the selected reach effect type determination ratio table is performed. Based on the ratio, the reach effect type of 1 is determined. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which one reach production type is determined from among four types of reach production types of super reach A to super reach D.

After the process of step S53252 is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach history update process of updating the reach history (step S53253). The reach history update process of step S53253 records that the reach effect type determined in the process of step S53252 is executed. The reach history update process can be executed, for example, by updating the reach history recorded in the effect control flag setting unit 191. After executing the process of step S53253, the effect control CPU 120 ends the reach effect type determination process (step S5325).
This is the end of the description of the reach effect type determination using FIG.

Next, the reach effect type determination ratio table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a reach effect type determination ratio table corresponding to the reach history.
In FIGS. 34A to 34D, FIGS. 34A to 34D show the transition of selection of the reach effect type determination ratio table when the super reach effect is executed in the order of super reach B → super reach A → super reach D. Shows. Note that, in the present embodiment, the reach effect type determination ratio table in the case where the reach of the super reach is executed in the order of super reach B → super reach A → super reach D and the reach history is recorded has been exemplified. When the reach effect is executed in another order, the reach effect type determination ratio table is selected according to the reach history.

  In each of the tables of FIGS. 34A to 34D, there are four types of reach effect types, namely, super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D. In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 7, the reach timing is set three times, that is, reach timings 1 to 3. Therefore, if the execution of the super-reach effect with a loss is restricted in the number of fluctuations that is not the reach timing, the effect of the fourth super-reach is always a big hit.

  FIG. 34 (A) shows a reach effect type determination ratio table when the effect of super reach has not been executed even once since the game state has become the ST state. That is, when the effect of super reach has not been executed even once since the game state has changed to the ST state, the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34 (A) is selected. Similarly, FIG. 34 (B) shows the reach effect type determination rate selected when the effect of the super reach B is executed after the game state becomes the ST state. FIG. 34C shows the reach effect type determination ratios selected when the effects of Super Reach A and Super Reach B are executed after the game state becomes the ST state. Further, FIG. 34 (D) shows the reach effect type determination ratios selected when the effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D are executed after the game state becomes the ST state. . In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach effect type determination rate tables illustrated in FIGS. 34A to 34D, not-shown reach effect type determination rate tables corresponding to the reach history are selected. In other words, when there are four types of reach production types for super reach, there are 15 reach production type determination ratio tables of selection 0 → 1 type, selection 1 → 4 types, selection 2 → 6 types, selection 3 → 4 types. You can In addition, when there are three types of reach effect types, similarly, there may be a total of seven reach effect type determination ratio tables.

  In FIG. 34 (A), since the effect of super-reach has not been executed since the ST state has been reached, "0" indicating that the reach history of super-reach A to C has not been executed is recorded. ing. The determination rate in FIG. 34 (A) is set to 40% for super reach A, 30% for super reach B, 20% for super reach C, and 10% for super reach D for each reach effect type. . That is, when the effect of super reach has not yet been executed after the ST state, the reach effect type is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 34 (A).

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the determination rate is set to be different depending on the reach effect type is exemplified, but the determination rate may be set to be the same rate for the reach effect type.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the reach history is recorded for each reach effect type and each of the four types of super reach is executed only once is illustrated. However, the same reach effect type may be executed more than once. In that case, only the number of executions is recorded in the reach history. When only the number of executions is recorded in the reach history, the reach effect type may be one type or a plurality of types.

FIG. 34 (B) shows a reach effect type determination ratio table that is selected when the effect of super reach B is executed after the game state becomes the ST state. That is, the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34 (B) is selected when the reach history read in the process of step S53251 in FIG. 33 indicates that the effect of super reach B has been executed. In the reach history of super reach B, "1" indicating that the effect of super reach B has been executed is set. The effect control CPU 120 can match the reach history read in the process of step S53251 with the reach history.
The determination rate in FIG. 34 (B) is set to 50% for super reach A, 0% for super reach B, 30% for super reach C, and 20% for super reach D for each reach effect type. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine the reach effect type according to, for example, the generated random number value and the determination rate. Here, since the determination rate of the super reach B is "0%", the effect of the super reach B that has been executed once will not be executed until the reach history is cleared in the process of step S465 of FIG.
That is, the execution of the super reach effect that has been executed once in the ST state and displayed as completed in the reach history is restricted. Therefore, by not executing the once-executed super reach effect again, it is possible to improve the interest.

FIG. 34C shows a reach effect type determination ratio table that is selected when the effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach A are executed after the game state has changed to the ST state. In the reach history of super reach A and super reach B, “1” indicating that the effects of super reach A and super reach B have been executed is recorded. That is, in the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34C, when the reach history read in the process of step S53251 of FIG. 33 indicates that the effects of super reach A and super reach B have been executed. To be selected.
The determination rate in FIG. 34C is set to 0% for super reach A, 0% for super reach B, 55% for super reach C, and 45% for super reach D for each reach effect type. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine the reach effect type according to, for example, the generated random number value and the determination rate. Here, since the determination rate of super reach A and super reach B is "0%", the production of super reach A and super reach B which has been executed once has the reach history cleared in the process of step S465 of FIG. Will not be executed until.

FIG. 34D shows a reach effect type determination ratio table that is selected when effects of Super Reach B, Super Reach A, and Super Reach D are executed after the game state becomes the ST state. In the reach history of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, "1" indicating that the effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D have been executed is recorded. That is, in the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34 (D), the reach history read in the process of step S53251 in FIG. 33 has already been performed as effects of super reach A, super reach B and super reach D. Is selected.
The determination rate in FIG. 34D is set to 0% for super reach A, 0% for super reach B, 100% for super reach C, and 0% for super reach D for each reach effect type. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine the reach effect type according to, for example, the generated random number value and the determination rate. Here, since the determination rate of Super Reach A, Super Reach B and Super Reach D is "0%", the reach history of the production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B and Super Reach D executed once is shown in FIG. It will not be executed until it is cleared in the process of step S465. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 7, the reach timing is set three times, and the effect of lost super-reach is limited when the number of fluctuations is not the reach timing. Therefore, super-reach C shown in FIG. 34D is executed. Sometimes it will be a super-reach production based on a variation pattern of super-reach (big hit).

The reach effect type determination ratio table illustrated in FIG. 34 illustrates the case where four types of super reach A to D are selected. However, the selected super reach is not limited to four types. For example, the selected super reach may be 1 to 3 types, or 5 or more types.
Further, in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 7, when the reach timing is up to four times, all types of super reach of super reach A to D shown in FIG. 34 are executed. However, for example, when the set reach timing is 3 times or less at the maximum, the maximum number of types of super reach performed in FIG. 34 is also 3 or less. On the other hand, when the reach timing is 5 times or more, at least one of the super reach A to D is performed twice.
The reach effect type determination rate table illustrated in FIG. 34 is the reach effect type determination rate table when three types of super reach effects are executed among at least super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Shows the transition. However, the reach effect type determination ratio table may be such that the effect of super reach is not executed at all in the number of ST times (50 times), or the effect of super reach is executed once or twice. In each of these cases, the reach effect type determination ratio table is selected. For example, when the effect of super reach is executed only once in the ST state, the reach effect type determination ratio table is selected once.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the determination rate is a fixed rate determined in advance according to the reach history is shown, but the determination rate may be variable depending on a predetermined condition. For example, the determination rate may be variable depending on the situation such as the operation of the push button 31B by the player.
This is the end of the description of the reach effect type determination ratio table using FIG. 34, and the end of the reach effect type determination in step S5325.

  32 again, after executing the process of step S5325, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the reach history display effect (step S5326). The effect control pattern corresponding to the reach history display effect includes effect control data for displaying the reach history on the image display device 5 illustrated in FIG. That is, the effect control pattern for notifying the player of the reach history is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S5324, when it is determined that it is not the reach timing (step S5324; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred (step S5327). Whether or not it is a big hit can be determined by a variable display result notification command. When it is judged as a big hit (step S5327; YES). The effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect type determination process (step S5325).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S5327; NO). The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect (step S5328).
The pseudo continuous effect is illustrated as an effect executed in order to avoid the execution of the super reach effect. In the present embodiment, in the ST state, even when the variation category command indicating the variation pattern of the super reach (miss) is received at the variation times that are not the reach timing, the production control CPU 120 executes the production of the super reach. It is a limitation. That is, in the alternative embodiment in which the determination determination table f described in FIG. 18F is selected instead of the determination table b selected in step S4127 of FIG. 17, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 5F is selected. The effect control CPU 120 may receive a variation category command indicating a variation pattern of PA4-1 (super reach α (miss)). The fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 5F is selected to determine whether it is the reach timing of step S5324 of FIG. 32 and whether it is the big hit of step S5327 when it is not the reach timing (step S; NO). In the case where the determination table b is used to determine the variation pattern, when it is determined to be super reach in the process of step S5323 (step S5323; YES), the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 may execute the process of step S5325 without performing the processes of step S5324 and step S5327.
In this embodiment, in the ST state, even when the variation pattern of the super reach (loss) is received with the variation number that is not the reach timing, the reach number is set when the upper limit is set for the execution number of the super reach effect. By not executing the super-reach with the number of fluctuations that is not the timing, it is possible to prevent the upper limit value of the super-reach effect from being exceeded.
In the case where the specific variable display pattern is determined during the ST state, by performing the effect of pseudo-continuous variation from the start of the variable display of the identification information for effect until the display result is derived, Limit the execution of reach production. Here, since the special figure change time is the special figure change time of the super reach effect, for example, when the normal reach effect or the non-reach effect is executed instead of the super reach effect, there is an uncomfortable feeling accompanied by an unnecessarily long variable display. The production will be executed, which may reduce the interest. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a pseudo-consecutive effect in which variable display of the loss is repeated many times in place of the super reach effect, thereby performing an effect without feeling uncomfortable and preventing a decrease in interest. Become.

After performing the process of step S5322, the process of step S5326, or the process of step S5328, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the process of the effect control pattern set (step S532).
This is the end of the description of the effect control pattern set (step S532) processing using FIG.

Again returning to FIG. 30, after performing the process of step S532, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and effect control. The process timer is started (step S535), and the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 are controlled according to the contents of the process data (step S536).
Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 consumes the command stored in the first start-winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start-winning prize reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the effect control CPU 120 selects the most one of the commands associated with the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the small buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the first starting mouth winning designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning time reception command buffer. Command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the removed command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. In the process of step S538, the command is deleted or shifted. Information stored in the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C or the second read-ahead notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted. After updating the value to "2" (step S539), the variable display start setting process is ended.
This is the end of the description of the possible display start setting process using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, description will be given of the variable-during-display effect process of step S172 executed in the effect control process process of step S75 of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect effect process.
In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control process timer (step S601) and also subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S602). The variable time timer is a timer for measuring the variation time, and is the special figure variation time set according to each variation pattern described in FIG.

  After executing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control process timer has timed out. (Step S603). When the effect control process timer times out (step S603; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value of the effect control process timer of the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S532, and effects. The control process timer is started (step S604), and the rendering device control process is executed according to the contents of the next process data (step S605).

  After executing the process of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach history display effect (step S605-1). The reach history display effect in step S605-1 is a process of notifying the player of the reach history using the effect device. The rendering device is, for example, a movable member included in the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the rendering model. That is, in the reach history display effect, the image display using the image display device 5, the sound output using the speaker 8, the lighting display using the lamp 9, and the operation of the movable member of the effect model are performed alone or in combination. Shall be executed. In the present embodiment, a case where an image for which the reach history is notified is displayed on the image display device 5 will be described as an example.

  The effect device control process in step S605 and the effect device control process in the reach history display effect in step S605-1 start execution of effects in accordance with the respective process data, and the process timer times out. It is assumed that the process is repeatedly executed until the effect device control process based on the process data is started. That is, when the effect control process timer has not timed out in the process of step S603, the effect device control process of step S605 in which the process is started is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the effect control process timer has not timed out (step S603; NO), or after performing the process of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variable time timer has timed out (step S606). ). When the variable time timer has timed out (step S606; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S607), The production process during variable display is ended.
On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (step S606; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display effect process without updating the value of the effect process flag.
This is the end of the explanation of the effect process during variable display using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the special figure waiting process will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure winning waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. In the special figure winning waiting process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is set (step S720). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is not set (step S720; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special symbol winning waiting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is set (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the symbol confirmation designation command reception flag (step S721), and the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes (step S722). After executing the process of step S722, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative design is a jackpot design (step S723). When it is determined that the fixed decorative design is not the jackpot design (step S723: NO), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S723). S726), the special figure hit waiting processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fixed decorative design is the big hit design (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S730). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received. When it is determined that the hit start designation command reception flag is not set (step S730; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure hit waiting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the hit start designation command reception flag (step S731).

  After performing the process of step S731, the effect control CPU 120 executes a reach history clear process of clearing the reach history (step S732). The reach history clear process of step S732 is a process of clearing the reach history updated in the reach history update process of step S53253 of the reach effect type determination (step S5325) of FIG. That is, in the special figure winning waiting process (step S173), if the confirmed decorative symbol becomes a big hit symbol (step S723; YES), the reach history recorded in the ST state is cleared.

After executing the process of step S732, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect (step S733), and updates the value of the effect process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit start process (step S174) (step S734). The special figure hit waiting process (step S173) is ended.
This is the end of the explanation of the special figure hitting waiting process using FIG.

Next, the reach history display displayed on the image display device 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a first display example of reach history display.
37A to 37L show the reach history displayed on the image display device 5 in time series. 37 (A) to (K), the reach history display 5HR is displayed at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5. The reach history display 5HR includes a reach history display 5HRA that displays the implementation status of the production of the super reach A, a reach history display 5HRB that displays whether or not the production of the super reach B has been implemented, and a production of the super reach C. It has a reach history display 5HRC that displays the status and a reach history display 5HRD that displays the implementation status of the effect of the super reach D. The reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD in the present embodiment are performing the super reach of each reach production type as the execution status of the super reach of each reach production type. A case where the display mode indicating that the display mode and the display mode indicating that the reach reach of each reach effect type has been performed (effect has ended) will be exemplified. By notifying that each reach effect type super reach has been implemented, since the player can recognize the super reach of the reach effect type that has not been implemented, it is possible to improve the interest and By informing the reach effect type of the super reach being performed, the player can recognize the reach effect type of the newly implemented super reach, so that the interest can be improved.

FIG. 37 (A) shows that the reach history display 5HR is displayed when the effect of super reach has not been executed even once in the ST state. Each of the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD indicates a display state for notifying that the reach effect type of super reach (A to D) is not implemented. In the present embodiment, as a display mode for notifying that the respective reach effect types are not implemented, the case where the characters A to D are displayed on a white background is illustrated. However, the method of notifying that each reach effect type is not implemented is not limited to this. For example, the color of characters A to D, the density of characters, the shape of characters, and the like may be changed according to the implementation situation.
In the image display device 5, the decorative patterns being variably displayed are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. That is, FIG. 37 (A) shows that the decorative design is changing in a situation in which the effect of super reach has not been executed even once after the ST state.

FIG. 37 (B) shows a reach state in which the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R display “7” as a stop design and the decorative design display area 5C is variably displayed from the display shown in FIG. 37 (A). It is a figure which is displayed (not shown), and after that, small symbols 5KL, 5KC, and 5KR are displayed in the reach state. It is assumed that the image display device 5 is displaying an image based on the reach effect whose reach effect type is super reach B.
In the reach history display 5HRB, a hatching for notifying that the reach effect type of the super reach B is being implemented is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize the reach effect type currently being implemented. Similar to FIG. 37 (A), the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are displayed to notify that the reach effect type is not implemented.

  FIG. 37 (C) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (B), the effect with the reach effect type of super reach B is finished, and the decorative pattern is displayed with a gap. The display of the reach history display 5HR is the same as that shown in FIG. 37 (B). The effect of the super reach B may include the display of the stopped decorative design.

FIG. 37 (D) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (C), the changed symbol is again in the variable display. In FIG. 37 (D), the reach history display 5HRB is displayed with a circle indicating that the reach effect type of the super reach B has been implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize the type of reach effect that has been performed.
It should be noted that the display notifying that the reach effect type has been implemented is not limited to the display of a circle. For example, instead of displaying the circle mark, the X mark may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed such that the reach effect type that has been executed is erased or filled. Further, it may be displayed so as to fill the square frame in which the reach effect type is displayed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the shaded area is displayed also when the performed reach effect type is notified is illustrated, but it is also possible to display without the shaded area.

FIG. 37 (E) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (D), after the decorative pattern displays the reach state, the effect of the reach effect type of super reach B is being performed. Small symbols 5KL, 5KC and 5KR are displayed in the reach state on the image display device 5.
In the reach history display 5HRA, hatching is displayed to inform that the reach effect type of the super reach A is being implemented. As in FIG. 37D, the reach history display 5HRB displays a circle indicating that the reach effect type of the super reach B has been implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect type that is currently being implemented is super reach A and that the already achieved reach effect type is super reach B. The reach history display 5HRC and the reach history display 5HRD are displayed to inform that the reach effect type is not implemented.

  FIG. 37 (F) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (D), the effect with the reach effect type of super reach A is finished, and the decorative design is displaying a loss. The reach history display 5HR is the same as that shown in FIG. 37 (E). The effect of the super reach A may include displaying the stopped decorative design.

  FIG. 37 (G) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (F), the changed symbol is again in the variable display. In FIG. 37 (G), the reach history display 5HRA and the reach history display 5HRB display a circle indicating that the reach effect types of the super reach A and the super reach B have been implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect types that have been executed are super reach A and super reach B.

FIG. 37 (H) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (G), after the decorative pattern displays the reach state, the effect of the reach effect type of super reach D is being performed. Small symbols 5KL, 5KC and 5KR are displayed in the reach state on the image display device 5.
In the reach history display 5HRD, a hatching for notifying that the reach effect type of the super reach D is being implemented is displayed. In the reach history display 5HRA and the reach history display 5HRB, similar to FIG. 37 (D), a circle mark indicating that the reach effect types of the super reach A and the super reach B have been executed is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect type that is currently being implemented is super reach D, and that the already achieved reach effect types are super reach A and super reach B. . The reach history display 5HRC is a display notifying that the reach effect type is not implemented.

  FIG. 37 (I) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (H), the effect with the reach effect type of super reach D has ended, and the decorative design is displaying a loss. The display of the reach history display 5HR is the same as that shown in FIG. 37 (F). The effect of the super reach D may include the display of the stopped decorative design.

  FIG. 37 (J) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (I), the changed symbol is again in the variable display. In FIG. 37 (J), the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, and the reach history display 5HRD notify that the reach effect types of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D have been implemented. A circle is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect types that have been executed are super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D.

FIG. 37 (K) is a diagram showing that, from the display shown in FIG. 37 (J), after the decorative pattern displays the reach state, the production of the reach production type of super reach C is being performed. Small symbols 5KL, 5KC and 5KR are displayed in the reach state on the image display device 5.
In the reach history display 5HRC, hatching is displayed to notify that the reach effect type of the super reach C is being implemented. In the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, and the reach history display 5HRD, as in the case of FIG. 37 (J), the reach effect types of the super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D have already been implemented. A circle is displayed to inform you. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect type currently being implemented is super reach C, and that the reach effect types already implemented are super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Can be recognized.
In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the super reach is performed is set to 4. Therefore, the player can recognize that the big hit is settled by executing the super reach C, and thus the interest can be improved. That is, the player can recognize the upper limit number of times of super reach and the implementation status by the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD that notify the state of the reach history.

FIG. 37 (L) is a diagram showing that the decorative pattern is stopped by a big hit from the display shown in FIG. 37 (K). In the present embodiment, the case where the display of the reach history display 5HR is erased when the decorative pattern is stopped by a big hit is illustrated. If the stop symbol is a big hit, the ST state ends and the reach history is cleared.
This is the end of the description of the reach history display displayed on the image display device 5 with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a display example of the reach history display after power failure recovery will be described. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a display example of the reach history display after power failure recovery.
The reach history display after power failure restoration illustrated in FIGS. 38A to 38C is set by the reach reach history display setting processing of step S5295 in the display restoration processing (step S529) of FIG. This is displayed in the reach history display effect process of step S605-1 in the variable display effect process (step S172). When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the power failure, the reach history is not backed up in the effect control board 12, as described above. On the other hand, in the power failure recovery process (step S520) executed after receiving the power failure recovery designating command from the main board 11, the ST state can be recovered by the game status designating command. Therefore, it is desirable to restore the reach history display as some display when the power is restored. The reach history display after power failure restoration illustrated in FIGS. 38 (A) to (C) is displayed regardless of the reach history before the power failure.
38 (A) to (C) exemplify the case where the decorative pattern is variably displayed, but the display timing of the reach history display is not limited to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 38 (A), the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are in a state in which a circle mark indicating that each reach effect type has been implemented is displayed. It shows the case of restoration.
When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, the reach history display is restored assuming that the super reach effect has been executed a predetermined number of times, so that after the recovery from the power outage, it is more than a predetermined number of times. It is possible to prevent the super reach performance from being executed.

  Further, if any one or more of the reach production types of Super Reach A to D have been implemented before the power failure, reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, or reach history display 5HRD. If the circle mark indicating that the operation has been performed is different from that before the power outage or there are fewer than before the power outage, the player may feel that the expected value for the jackpot has decreased due to the power outage. .

  In the present embodiment, all of the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are restored as already implemented, and the player is expected to hit the jackpot compared to before the power failure. By not making the user feel that the value has decreased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  However, assuming that all of the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD have been performed, the player is convinced of a big hit when the next super reach effect is executed. It may end up. Therefore, when the reach history display is restored in the display mode illustrated in FIG. 38A, the effect of super reach (loss) may be limited when the jackpot is not a big hit.

  In FIG. 38 (B), the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD notify that it is unknown whether or not each reach effect type has been implemented? This shows the case where the restoration is performed with the mark displayed.

For example, if the implementation status displayed on the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD is different before and after the power outage, the player may feel a decrease in expectation. There is a case where the interest is deteriorated.
In the present embodiment, the fact that it is unknown whether or not the reach effect type has been executed is notified? By displaying the mark, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the expected value for the big hit has decreased, and prevent the interest from decreasing.

In FIG. 38 (C), the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are restored in a displayed state informing that each reach effect type is not implemented. The case is shown.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the reach history display is restored as if the super reach effect was not executed, preventing the reach from ever being executed after the recovery, which is an interesting feature. It is possible to improve.

  For example, if any one or more of the reach production types of Super Reach A to D have been performed before the power failure, reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, or reach history display 5HRD. If there are more circles indicating that implementation has been performed than before the power failure, even if all of reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, and reach history display 5HRD are implemented, it is a big hit. However, the interest may be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are all restored as unexecuted, so that the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, and the reach are displayed. Even if all of the history display 5HRC and the reach history display 5HRD have been carried out, a big hit does not occur and it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

As described with reference to FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 can know the number of remaining fluctuations in the ST state by receiving the probability variation number designation command from the main board 11. The effect control CPU 120 may change the number of displays for notifying that the reach history display 5HR has been performed, depending on the number of remaining fluctuations. For example, if the number of remaining fluctuations is 25 or more, the number of displays indicating that the reach history display 5HR has been performed is set to 2, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is less than 25, a display indicating that the reach history display 5HR has been performed is displayed. The number of may be three.
This is the end of the description of the display example of the reach history display after power failure recovery, which is shown in FIG. 38.

  Next, the variable display that does not reach the reach state will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a display example of a variable display that does not reach the reach state. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a display example of the variable display that does not reach the reach state. The variable display that does not reach the reach state will be described by comparing FIGS. 39 and 40. The variable display that does not reach the reach state is an effect mode executed when the variation pattern is PA1-1 or PB1-1 as described in FIG. 5E. PA1-1 or PB1-1 in FIG. 5E is determined when the variation counter is within 10 times in the ST state. With the variable display that does not reach the reach state, it is possible to shorten the variation time within 10 times of the variation number counter, improve the sense of speed, and improve interest.

  In FIG. 39 (A), the decorative display is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. 39 and 40, the reach history display 5HR displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 is in the ST state, and the operation of the reach history display 5HR will not be particularly described.

  In FIG. 39 (B), in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in which the decorative symbols with a loss are stopped are displayed. As for the decorative design, the same design is stopped in the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R and the decorative design display area 5C is variable until the display state of FIG. 39 (A) transits to the display state of FIG. 39 (B). The reach status that is displayed is not taken. That is, FIG. 39 (B) shows that the effect mode of "immediate loss" in which the symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped all at once is implemented.

  In FIG. 39C, in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative design is variably displayed again from the stop display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 39B.

  In FIG. 39 (D), the jackpot decorative design is stopped and displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. As for the decorative design, the same design is stopped in the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R and the decorative design display area 5C is variable until the display state of FIG. 39 (C) transits to the display state of FIG. 39 (D). The reach status that is displayed is not taken. That is, FIG. 39 (D) shows that the "immediate hit" effect mode in which the symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped all at once is carried out.

  FIG. 40 (A) shows the same display state as FIG. 39 (A). That is, the decorative design is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

  FIG. 40 (B) shows that the same symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed in the reach state. The effect mode of the display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 40 is that in the reach state between the start of the variable display of the decorative design and the display of the stop design, the effect of immediate loss or immediate hit is implemented in FIG. 39. It is different from the presentation mode of the display of the decorative pattern shown. After reaching the reach state, a predetermined reach effect may be carried out.

  In FIG. 40 (C), the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols with a loss in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. FIG. 40 (C) is displayed from the display state of FIG. 40 (A) via an effect mode showing the reach state of FIG. 40 (B). Therefore, the variation time of the decorative pattern is longer than that in the effect mode shown in FIG. 39.

  In FIG. 40 (D), in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative design is variably displayed again from the stop display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 40 (C). The display mode of FIG. 40 (D) is the same as the display mode of FIG. 39 (C).

  FIG. 40 (E) shows that the same symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed in the reach state. The effect mode of displaying the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 40 (E) is the same as the effect mode of displaying the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 40 (B), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 40 (F), the jackpot decorative design is stopped and displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The display in FIG. 40 (F) is displayed via the effect mode showing the reach state in FIG. 40 (E) from the display state in FIG. 40 (D). Therefore, the variation time of the decorative pattern is longer than that in the effect mode shown in FIG. 39.
As described above, the repetition time of the effect form of immediate loss shown in FIG. 39 shortens the variation time, so that the sense of speed is improved compared to the effect form shown in FIG. However, if the shortening effect that shortens the variation time is executed for all the ST times, the effect of super reach is not executed and the interest may be reduced. In the present embodiment, the shortening effect can be executed at the first 10 times of variation after entering the ST state, and the reach effect can be executed at a predetermined reach timing, so that the interest can be improved.
This is the end of the description of the variable display that does not reach the reach state, using FIGS. 39 and 40.

Although the gaming machine in the present embodiment has been described above, changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the spirit of the present invention.
In the present embodiment, a variable display of the identification information is executed, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming machine can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and after being controlled to the advantageous state. , A special state control means for controlling to a special state, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect that indicates whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect execution means, the controlled advantageous state Although the case where the specific effect is executed in the special state at the timing according to is described, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be as follows.

For example, in the present embodiment, the reach effect is illustrated as an effect that suggests whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. In the reach effect, after the reach state is reached, the changing speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a performance operation different from that before the reach state is executed. However, the effect as described above may be performed before the reach state is reached.
Further, as described above, the specific effect may be a pseudo continuous effect. The pseudo continuous effect may be one in which the pseudo continuous variation is once or two or more times. Moreover, the specific effect may be an effect (for example, PA4-3, 4 etc.) in which super reach is combined with the pseudo continuous effect described in FIG. 5A.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the ST number (probability variation number) is a predetermined fixed number such as 50 times or 100 times. However, for example, the number of STs may be changed under a predetermined condition. In that case, the reach timing described with reference to FIG. 7 may be changed according to the number of STs. For example, when the number of STs is controlled to be either 50 or 100, the reach timing when the number of STs is 100 may be doubled when the number of STs is 50.

  Also, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It has been described that the specific effect executing means may limit the execution of the specific effect when the timing is not the special state, but the gaming machine of the present embodiment is as follows. Good.

For example, in the present embodiment, the case where the specific effect is not executed has been illustrated as a method of restricting the execution of the specific effect, but the method of restricting is not limited to this. For example, in a special state, the rate at which the specific effect is determined when the reach timing is not reached may be reduced. In the present embodiment, in the variation category determination table shown in FIG. 19B, the case where PA4 or PA5 is determined is 0% is exemplified, but, for example, by setting the PA4 determination rate to several%, At the reach timing shown in FIG. 19C, the ratio of execution of super reach may be reduced as compared with the variation category determination table to limit execution of the specific effect.
Further, as a method of limiting the execution of the specific effect, another effect may be executed instead of the specific effect. For example, instead of executing the super reach effect as the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect may be limited by executing the pseudo continuous effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, as a method of limiting the execution of the specific effect, the case where the CPU 103 on the main board 11 determines the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not executed when the timing is not in the special state is illustrated. However, the method of limiting the execution of the specific effect is not limited to this. For example, the reach timing may be grasped by the effect control board 12, and it may be determined whether to execute the specific effect or the effect other than the specific effect according to the variation pattern from the main board 11.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the first specific effect, and the specific effect executing means is the first effect. The case where one specific effect or the second specific effect may be executed has been described, but the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be as follows.

  For example, although a case has been described with the present embodiment where two types of specific effects, the first specific effect and the second specific effect, are included, the specific effects are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. . For example, the third specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the second specific effect is further included, and the specific effect executing means executes the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect. It may be.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the specific effect executed in the special state may be notified, but the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be as follows. Good.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as an example of displaying the reach history on the image display device 5 as the notification of the specific effect executed in the special state, the notification of the specific effect indicates the reach to the image display device 5. The history display, the sound output of the reach history using the speaker 8, the lighting display of the reach history using the lamp 9, and the operation indicating the reach history of the movable member of the production model may be performed alone or in combination. . Further, the notification of the specific effect is illustrated in the ST state during variable display or stop display of the decorative pattern, but the timing of notifying the specific effect is not limited to this. For example, a two-dimensional code representing a specific effect executed from the setting screen displayed on the image display device 5 after the end of the game may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify it.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the execution of the specific effect executed and notified in the special state may be restricted, but the gaming machine of the present embodiment is as follows. It may be one.

In the present embodiment, as a method for restricting the execution of the specific effect, a case has been illustrated as an example where the specific effect that has been executed and notified is not executed, but the method for restricting the execution of the specific effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that limits the number of executions of the specific effect that is executed and notified. For example, when the number of executions of the predetermined specific effect is limited to two, it may be restricted not to be executed the third time.
In addition, in the present embodiment, as a method of limiting the execution of the specific effect, a case where the specific effect that has not been executed is randomly selected from the specific effects is executed, but the execution order of the specific effects is predetermined. By executing the specific effects in a predetermined order, the execution of the specific effects that have been executed and notified may be restricted.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the notification of the specific effect may be restored as if the specific effect has been executed a predetermined number of times. Although the case has been described, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be as follows.

The present embodiment exemplifies a case where the notification of the specific effect is restored on the assumption that the specific effect has been executed a predetermined number of times. However, for example, the number of times of restoration may be changed by lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the case where the notification of the restored specific effect is in the same display mode as that of the notification of the normal specific effect is illustrated, but, for example, the restored specific effect is restored. A predetermined display indicating that may be displayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the notification of the specific effect may be restored as if the specific effect is not executed. Although described, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is not limited to the above example.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a case has been described in which, after being controlled to the special state, the specific effect may not be executed until the variation of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of variations. The gaming machine of the embodiment may be as follows.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as an example in which the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached, the case of determining a variation pattern of immediate hit or immediate loss reduction / non-reach variation that does not involve a reach state has been described. Those that do not execute the effect are not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern of shortened / non-reach with a reach state may be determined. Alternatively, a non-reach variation pattern (variation categories PA2, PB2) may be determined. Alternatively, a variation pattern of normal reach (variation categories PA3, PB3) may be determined.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is a first jackpot type that performs a specific effect a first number of times and a second jackpot type that performs a specific effect a second number of times greater than the first number. In the above description, the specific effect executed first in the second number of times may be earlier than the specific effect first executed in the first number of times. The gaming machine of this embodiment may be as follows.

For example, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the specific effect executed first in the second number of times has a timing earlier than the specific effect executed first in the first number of times. The specific effect executed last in the second number may be a timing later than the specific effect finally executed in the first number (for example, the end of the jackpot 1 in FIG. 7). The reach timing of is 30th, while the last reach timing of jackpot 10 is 39th, which is later than that.)
Further, the comparison of the timing of executing the specific effect in the first jackpot type and the timing of executing the specific effect in the second jackpot type may be performed by using the average value of the reach timings for executing the specific effect. Good For example, the average value of the big hit 10 in FIG. 7 is (14 + 20 + 39) / 3≈24th time, and the specific effect is executed earlier than the 30th big hit, etc.).

  Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various device operations such as the device configuration of the gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various effect operations including the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 are described. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, by using a frequency which is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in a game is given and the given game is given. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a game area by using a score or a game score given by a prize for a game.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is a plurality of types depending on the operation of the operation lever by the player when a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine. It is also possible to do so.

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of the change pattern indicating the change time and the change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of pseudo-relation, 1 is set when the change is started. Although an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern command is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation and whether or not there is a sliding effect (before the reach, the so-called first A command indicating the variation time and variation mode (before 2 stops) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect, etc., after the reach (so-called second if not reach). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and the fluctuation mode of (after stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer notifies each of the two commands of the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the “ratio” has a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0% allocated).

  Other than that, the device configuration of the gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. The range can be arbitrarily changed and modified.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a game ball is paid out to a player as a prize, and the player shoots the paid out game ball to a game area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recorded information of a game recording medium such as a card or a membership card, and the given game score, or The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a game area by using a game score given by a prize for a game.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game machine that uses a game medium is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probability variation state after the jackpot game is finished based on the probability variation jackpot being determined, but the gaming machine is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above-described embodiments to the gaming machine that is controlled to the probability change state after the end.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result. When the predetermined display result is displayed and displayed on the display means, the game machine controls to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player. However, when the game score is not 0, the game score is used in the game machine. A game is played by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game score is awarded when the game ball wins the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game scores is inserted, and a game recording medium. It may be provided with a game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion slot.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified, and derives and displays a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is shown. Not limited. For example, the changing special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol that is derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the fixed special symbol that is derived and displayed as the variable display result does not have to be included in the changing plural kinds of special symbols.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of decorative designs that can be identified, and derives and displays the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result has been described. Not limited. For example, the fluctuating decorative design and the fixed decorative design derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, the fixed decorative design that is derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of changing decorative designs.

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Gaming board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start winning prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd starting winning prize memory display area 5H ... Starting winning prize Memory display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... 1st starting opening switch 22B ... 2nd starting opening switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Special state control means for controlling to a special state after being controlled to the advantageous state,
And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect that indicates whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The specific Starring unloading there are a plurality of types,
The types of the advantageous states include a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means,
When the specific effect is executed in the special state at a timing according to the controlled advantageous state and the specific effect is executed a plurality of times during the special state, the first specific effect is executed at the first timing. When performing, a second specific effect having a higher expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific effect is executed at a second timing at a predetermined interval,
In the special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, the specific effect is executed a first number of times,
In the special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state, the specific effect is executed a second number of times greater than the first number of times,
The execution timing of the specific effect executed first in the second number of times is earlier than the execution timing of the specific effect executed first in the first number of times,
A special display that notifies a plurality of types of the specific effects that can be executed in the special state, and displays a special display that notifies the executed specific effects of the plurality of types of the specific effects after executing the specific effects. A gaming machine further comprising an executing means.